Download (6Mb) - USP Electronic Research Repository - The ...

31 July 1996 Australian Systematic Botany, 9, 361-490 

A Preliminary Floristic Survey 

of the Benthic Marine Algae 

of Rotuma Island 

Antoine De Ramon N'Yeurt 

Marine Studies Programme, The University of the South Pacific, 

PO Box 1168 Suva, Fiji. 

Abstract 

A preliminary study of the intertidal benthic macroalgal flora of the island of Rotuma (120301S 

177°05'E; politically attached to the Fiji Island group) has revealed a total of 88 taxa, including 41 

Rhodophyceae, 11 Phaeophyceae and 36 Chlorophyceae, representing the first published records of 

marine algae for this island. Of these, 30 represent new records for the Fijian flora. The Rotuman flora 

is distinct from that of Fiji, a probable consequence of habitat limitations and high exposure regimes on 

Rotuman reefs that have led to a predominance of low-profile, robust algal species. A distinct 

north-south distribution pattern was found, brought about by variations in exposure regimes. 

Biogeographic considerations further dissociated the Rotuman and Fijian floras, the former being more 

equatorial and in the path of oceanic currents dispersing algal species from donor areas in the central 

and western Pacific. 

Introduction 

The tropical Pacific Ocean, including areas between approximately 30°N and 30°S, is a 

rich and varied habitat for algae (Hoek 1984) but has only been studied phycologically fairly 

recently. Indeed, most phycological study has taken place in temperate regions, and the 

tropics, particularly the South Pacific and tropical regions of the Indian Ocean, have been the 

subject of relatively few investigations. 

In working with tropical Pacific algae, the main limitation is the lack of a comprehensive 

flora for the region, as well as the lack of generally available and accurately identified 

herbarium collections. At present, South Pacific algae are held in scattered herbaria, 

including the Bernice P. Bishop Museum at the State Museum for Natural and Cultural 

History of Hawaii (BISH); the University of Hawaii (UH); the Department of Botany at the 

University of Auckland; the British Museum (BM) and the University of California at 

Berkeley (UC). A steadily growing collection of tropical algae recently has been deposited at 

the South Pacific Regional Herbarium at the University of the South Pacific, Suva, Fiji 

(SUVA). There is a conspicuous absence of monographs on most of the tropical algal genera, 

and one has to look for information in widely scattered publications, many of which are not 

illustrated, or consist of incomplete checklists. Among the few monographs are those of 

Halimeda (Hillis-Colinvaux 1959), Polysiphonia (Hollenberg 1968a, 1968b), and Codium 

(Silva 1960). 

The knowledge of algal floras of islands in the tropical Pacific is of great importance, 

firstly from a biogeographic point of view. The world can be divided into a number of 

regions as defined by their temperature regimes, and these latitudinal boundaries often (but 

not always) coincide with floristic boundaries, as particular species of algae each have their 

own range of water-temperature tolerances (Hoek 1984). Comparisons between floras of 

different isolated islands within the same phytogeographic boundaries enable one to 

extrapolate possible dispersal routes and patterns for algae from their presumed Indo-Pacific

centre of origin, which may be linked to e.g. ocean currents or artificial dispersal agents. 

This knowledge can in turn broaden our appreciation of world-wide algal distribution 

patterns over geological time. Also, endemism rates can indicate evolutionary rates of algal 

species. Secondly, the study of algal distribution patterns on islands can yield useful 

information about the state of the particular reef systems they are associated with. Tropical 

reefs are very delicate and balanced ecological systems, exhibiting surprising productivity in 

otherwise nutrient-poor tropical oceanic waters. Peculiar macro-algal distribution patterns 

(e.g. sudden algal blooms) often reflect damaged or polluted reef environments. Phycological 

knowledge is therefore one of the essential prerequisites when undertaking such activities as 

environmental impact assessments or other baseline ecological surveys. Thirdly, there is an 

intrinsic value in any inventory of a new flora, as it contributes to a documentation of the 

world's biota. 

Rotuma Island is the most northerly island in the Fijian Island group and has been 

neglected in surveys of the Fijian algal flora. Few aspects of the island have received any 

scientific attention. Snow (1969) published a bibliography of Fiji, Tonga and Rotuma which 

includes several historical, sociological, and scientific entries for Rotuma. To the author's 

knowledge, however, no phycological survey of the algal flora of the island has yet been 

undertaken, despite fairly extensive surveys of nearby Fiji. The only previous records of 

Rotuman algae that could be traced by the author are two collections of Meristotheca by W. 

E. Booth in October, 1975 and August, 1977, housed in the phycological herbarium at the 

Bernice P. Bishop Museum, Honolulu, Hawaii (F. M. Norris, pers. comm.). 

Owing to its isolation from the rest of the Fiji group (and for that matter any other island 

group), it could be expected that there might be noticeable differences in the macroalgal 

species composition and distribution of that island. Being 6" north of Fiji, Rotuma also 

possesses a more equatorial climate than the remainder of the island group, leading to 

interesting speculations about floristic comparisons with the rest of Fiji and the Pacific in 

general. In addition, the fringing Rotuman reefs are essentially non-polluted, and a study of 

these could offer a useful means of comparison with other reef systems in the region. In 

order to address some of the above questions, it was decided to conduct a phycological 

survey of Rotuma and compile a preliminary checklist, as well as to make observations on 

the local habitats, species composition and distributions, and ecological interactions on the 

island's reefs and other marine habitats. 

Historical Background 

The earliest reports of marine benthic algae from the Fijian island group were by Gmnow 

(1874), who listed 37 species from Ovalau. In 1876, Dickie listed nine species, including 

four new records, from the same locality. Askenasy (1888) published a list of 10 species 

from Matuku Island collected during the H.M.S. 'Gazelle' Expeditions. It was almost 85 

years later before Chapman (1971) published a checklist of some 79 species for Fiji, to 

which he added a further 17 in 1977. Further additions to the Fijian flora were published by 

Kapraun and Bowden (1978), and the early history of algal collecting in Fiji, together with 

biogeographic and ecological aspects, was reviewed by McRaild (1978). Five years later, 

Booth et al. (1983) made some preliminary attempts at culturing Eucheuma striatum in Fiji. 

In 1984, Itono and Ajisaka published taxonomic notes on the Fijian marine algae, while 

Itono (1985a, 1985b) described some Fijian Rhodophyta. In 1984, Kraft documented a deep- 

water form of Callophycus serratus from Fiji. The most detailed recent reports of Fiji algae 

have been by Kasahara (1985, 1988), who studied collections made by two Kagoshima Maru 

Expeditions to Fiji in 1982 as part of a scientific survey of the South Pacific by Kagoshima 

University in Japan, as well as extensive collections that he made on Viti Levu. Kasahara's 

1985 thesis listed 76 Chlorophyta and Rhodophyta (including 37 new records), while his 

profusely illustrated 1988 report listed 43 Chlorophyta. Unfortunately, he did not publish his 

Phaeophyta collections, although duplicates were donated to the South Pacific Regional 

Herbarium and are awaiting identification. In 1991, Garbary et al. listed many new 

distribution records for Fijian algae (82 species listed, based on collections made in August 

1980, August 1981 and February 1982). Later that same year, South (1991) published a

Benthic Marine Algae of Rotuma Island 363 

checklist of marine benthic algae from Dravuni Island, in the Astrolabe Reef region, listing a 

total of 71 species, 5 of which were new records for Fiji. South (1992) also published an 

illustrated catalogue of the Halimeda species reported from Fiji, and in 1993 reported on the 

edible seaweeds of these islands. The most comprehensive overview of Fijian algae to date is 

the 1992 checklist by South and Kasahara, listing a total of 314 species including 11 

Cyanophyceae, 99 Chlorophyceae, 36 Phaeophyceae and 168 Rhodophyceae. Since then, 

further additions to the flora were made by a number of researchers (Raj 1993; South 1993; 

South and N'Yeurt 1993; South et al. 1993; N'Yeurt et al. 1995, 1996a, 1996b), bringing the 

total Fijian macroalgal flora (including Rotuma) to 422 taxa. In addition, recent visits by 

D. S., and M. M. Littler, from the Smithsonian Institution in Washington, DC., to the Great 

Astrolabe Reef, Kadavu, have yielded many new records of benthic algae that await 

publication. However, most of the Fijian algal flora is still poorly known, as much of the Lau 

Group, Kadavu, Lomaiviti Group, Yasawas, Taveuni and Vanua Levu have yet to be 

investigated in detail. 

Materials and Methods 

Field Survey Methods 

An initial survey of the island was carried out, from January to May 1992. A further survey was 

conducted from December 1992 to February 1993, with additional specimens collected between 

September 1993 and January 1994, and between November 1994 and January 1995. 

A preliminary visual survey of the coastline was carried out, and 19 representative sites around the 

island were chosen for inspection (Fig. 1). Surveys were carried out either by wading or snorkelling. 

Considering the sparse distribution of the algae, and the turbulent and exposed conditions on the often 

very narrow fringing reefs, it was deemed impractical to lay transects. Instead, the area was visually 

inspected for algal growth, with salient distribution and reef profile features being recorded on an 

underwater writing board. Owing to the exposed nature of the reefs and the lack of diving facilities and 

trained partners, it was considered dangerous to sample subtidal habitats. Consequently, all collections 

were from the intertidal region, imposing obvious limitations on the overall results obtained. 

Photographs of algae in situ and of the general habitats were taken using an Olympus 35 mm camera 

and a Pentax SLR variable-focus camera. Algal specimens were hand-collected or scraped off the 

substratum using a knife, put into polyethylene plastic bags or vials, promptly preserved in 5% 

formaldehyde in seawater, and stored in light-proof plastic containers for eventual shipment back to Fiji. 

Laboratoiy Methods 

Hand-sections or freezing-microtome sections were made for general observation of internal 

anatomy. Slides were stained with either crystal violet or 1% acidified aniline blue, and made 

permanent if necessary by embedding in glycerine jelly (Drury et al. 1967) following impregnation of 

the material in 50% glycerol water solution for 2-3 h. Slides were examined using a Zeiss compound 

microscope. A camera-lucida attachment (Abb6 Drawing Tube, Carl Zeiss) was used to make pencil 

drawings of the specimens. Observations on larger specimens and general sorting of the collections 

were performed using a Labova dissecting microscope. Slides are housed in the South Pacific Regional 

Herbarium in a numbered series prefixed by 'S' (slide). 

Voucher specimens of larger algae were first dried using an algal press, then mounted onto 

herbarium paper. Specimens were deposited into the South Pacific Regional Herbarium housed at the 

University of the South Pacific in Suva. Collection numbers are preceded by 'USP'. Ektachromes and 

black-and-white photographs of identified algae were obtained in the laboratory, either using formalin- 

preserved or pressed specimens. Macrophotography was undertaken with a Nikon F2A using a 55 mm 

1 : 3.5 lens, and a ring flash (Sunpak GX8R ring flash attachment, Sunpak Corporation, Tokyo, Japan) in 

conjunction with Kodak EClOO (Ektachromes) or Kodak PX125 (Black-and-white) film. 

Photomicrographs were taken with a Zeiss Photoscope I11 (*I S = slide collections. Accession numbers 

refer to specimens housed at the Phycological Herbarium, South Pacific Regional Herbarium, The 

University of the South Pacific (SUVA) and are preceded by 'USP' to distinguish them from the 

angiosperm collection). 

Taxonomy and Nomenclature 

Nomenclature used in identification of the algae follows that of Silva et al. (1987) unless stated 

otherwise. The lists of Tsuda and Wray (1977) and of Dawson (1954, 1956, 1957) were used as 

references for the region. Taylor's Bikini atoll flora (1950) was also widely used, as were Womersley 

and Bailey's (1970) Solomon Islands list, Tsuda and Ganigue's (1988) New Caledonia list, Payri and

Meinesz's (1985) Polynesia checklist and South and Kasahara's (1992) Fiji checklist. Price and Scott's 

recent (1992) handbook on Australian Great Barrier Reef turf Rhodophyta proved to be a very useful 

visual and descriptive guide to many genera and species, as were Millar and Kraft's (1993, 1994) 

catalogues of New South Wales algae. A number of other papers and books dealing with floras of the 

tropical Pacific and comparable areas elsewhere in the world were also used, such as Kasahara's (1985) 

thesis on Fijian Benthic Algae; Dawson's (1953-1963) Marine Red Algae of Pacific Mexico, Taylor's 

(1960) 'Algae of the Tropical Coast of the Americas', Lucas' (1935) Algae of Lord Howe Island, 

Chapman's (1955) paper on Funafuti algae, Jaasund's (1976) Marine Algae of Tanzania and the Littler 

et al. (1989) Caribbean algae handbook, as well as numerous other scattered papers which are referred 

to as the need arises in the species description section of this survey. It is to be emphasised, however, 

that for all literature cited it is assumed that the identifications upon which these records are based are 

correct. This reservation is especially necessary in dealing with Pacific algae, where names for 

temperate species are often used that are subsequently found to have been wrongly applied. 

Study Site 

Physiography 

The island of Rotuma (12'29's and 177'05'E) is situated about 465 km north-west of Cikobia, the 

northern-most island in the Fiji group. It is fairly isolated from other island groups in the central South 

Pacific (Fig. 2). Rotuma lies in a general depth of 3.7 km on a plateau that includes the Tongan and Fiji 

groups. The island itself, however, is a totally separate basaltic shield volcano edifice of late Pleistocene 

age (about 0.2 Ma) situated on a 200 km2 submarine bank of Pleistocene or earlier limestone which in 

turn lies over a former volcanic edifice of Tertiary age (Woodhall 1987). The submarine bank (remnants 

of a former atoll) results in fairly shallow coastal waters (3746 m) seaward of the fringing reef (Fiji 

Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries 1983). There are no real lagoons, although in two places (Maka 

Bay and Hapmafau Bay) there are shallow areas of relatively calm waters inside a reef approaching the 

barrier class. 

The island is of more recent volcanic origin than the nearby Fiji group, which dates from the late 

Eocene (Menard and Hamilton 1963). The most recent Rotuman lavas are about 15000 years old, and 

the island has a basaltic rocky core covered with rich volcanic soil (Gardiner 1898). Occupying about 

44 km2, the main island is about 14.5 km long and 4.5 km wide at its largest point. It is surrounded by 

nine small islets (Fig. 3), five of which occur on the surrounding reef (Hauati'u; Hauamea'me'a; 

Solnohu; Solkope; Afgaha). Of the remaining four, two have no reefs (Uea (77 ha; 262 m high; cliff- 

bound); Hofliua (< 1 km2; 58 m high; volcanic; cliff-bound)) and the rest (Hatana (4 ha; 18.3 m high; 

volcanic); Hofhavunglola (small islet)) share the same reef platform. They are important nesting sites 

for seabirds (Booby (Sula sp.); Noddy Tern (Anous sp.)). The coastline is about 39.6 km long and backs 

a reef area estimated to be about 16 km2. The majority of the reef is fringing, with a maximum width of 

1.5 km at Noa'tau on the eastern coast and a minimum of less than 100 m wide between Halafa and 

Maftoa, and Losa and 'Anmosega Point. The highest peak (on Uea Island) reaches about 262 m. There 

are no real rivers on the island, although two perennial streams occur on Uea Island. A small stream 

flowing from the crater of the Solele cone has carved a shallow valley 10-15 m deep west of Motusa 

(Woodhall 1987). Rotuma consists of two distinct parts (east and west) joined by a narrow, sandy, 

vegetated isthmus at Motusa (possibly human-made over an intervening reef, according to Rotuman 

tradition supported by geological data (Gardiner 1898; Woodhall 1987)). An extensive submerged sand 

and coral bank extends approximately 8 km from Malhaha towards the north-west, and a submarine 

bank (Whale Bank) approximately 5 X 1.5 km with a mean depth of 30-33 m lies to the west (Fiji 

Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries 1983). 

A noticeable feature of the island is its remarkably regular U-shaped range of hills (Fig. 4), which 

reaches a maximum elevation of 262 m. The hills either have a flat depression at the top or rise into a 

ridge, although one (Mt Satarua) has characters of both (Gardiner 1898). The soil at the foot of these hills 

is extremely rich and arable, which accounts for the Rotuman custom of locating plantations on hill slopes. 

Everywhere there are medium to large blocks of a very vesicular lava, which among other things are used 

by Rotumans to make the ubiquitous pig fences around the island. There are about 14 coastal villages 

circling the island, with a total population of approximately 3000. Most of the surrounding islets are 

volcanic in origin, and while they have a gentle slope towards the mainland, their seaward face often 

consists of precipitous cliffs above a narrow fringing reef 10-20 m broad (e.g. Hauatia Island). Freshwater 

seeps on the beach from the underground water table occur in numerous places around the coast. 

There are no large marine swamps or coastal mangroves on Rotuma, although shallow subtidal 

seagrass beds (Syringodium isoetifoliurn (Ascherson) Dandy) exist at one site (Maka Bay). The only 

mangroves on the island are found at Paptea on the east coast, although the small swamp is located 

close to pig sties about 300 m inland and consists of Bruguiera gymnorhiza trees intermixed with 

coconut palms (Cocos nucifera) and other vegetation. The water level can rise up to 30 cm at high tide, 

and the substratum is sandy to muddy. Seawater appears to seep in underneath the intervening village


and road to reach the swamp, which occurs in depressions at or below sea-level. This observation seems 

to contradict an earlier report by Dunlap and Singh (1980) that mangroves do not occur on Rotuma, 

although perhaps the authors were referring only to coastal mangrove habitats. 

The island is 6" north of Fiji and is noticeably warmer. July temperatures rarely drop below 25OC, 

and daytime temperatures can rise up to 35°C. Water temperature ranges from 26-32°C (pers. obs.). 

The prevailing winds are east to south except during December, January, February and March, in these 

months, they vary from north to west (Gardiner 1898). A west-north-west current at approximately 

1 kph surrounds the island (Fiji Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries 1983). Rain is frequent and 

regular (weekly; about 3550 mm yrl; Woodhall 1987) and hence droughts are uncommon. Hurricanes 

which normally hit neighbouring Fiji every 3 years or so rarely affect Rotuma, the last major hurricane 

to hit the island being Bebe in 1972 which caused widespread destruction. 

Reef Structure 

The reefs are in most cases fringing except in two places (Maka and Hapmafau Bays), where they 

approach the barrier class and enclose a shallow lagoon. The reefs are between 100-1500 m wide and 

can be quite exposed at low tide, drying between 0.6 to 1.5 m at each new and full moons (when tidal 

ranges are greatest). There are no mudflats or coastal marine mangrove areas on Rotuma, but Maka Bay 

has extensive seagrass beds of Syringodium isoetifolium and a somewhat muddier substratum owing to 

its lagoon and relative protection from wave action leading to sediment accumulation. At the other 

extreme, Lopta reef is probably the narrowest on the island, being only 60-100 m wide in places and 

considerably exposed. Consequently, algal habitats in the various Rotuman reefs differ according to 

their extent and degree of exposure. Among the main constituents of the reefs are Acropora spp., except 

at Maka Bay and 'Ahau where brittle Pavona decussata Dana rubble is dominant. The latter species of 

coral forms an almost continuous pavement on the outer reef at Maka Bay. 

Dominant Species 

A distinct north-south disjunct of algal distribution was observed on the island, chiefly a result of 

the different habitats on opposite coasts (fairly deep and sandy on the north, more rocky and exposed at 

low tide in the south). Typical and dominant northern species include a wide range of Halimeda and 

Caulerpa spp., and widespread plants of Melanamansia glomerata that inhabit rubble of Acropora sp. 

on reefs from Mea to Oinafa. In the south, however, only one species of Halimeda (H. opuntia) was 

dominant, the rest of the species being chiefly small rhodophytes (Heterosiphonia, Ceramiales such as 

Herposiphonia) although the larger red alga, Meristotheca procumbens, was fairly abundant on the 

south-west coast. The eastern and western stations exhibited characters from both northern and southern 

habitats. The two small lagoons on the island had characteristic floras associated with their relatively 

calm waters. Maka Bay on the north coast was dominated by Sargassum polycystum, Rhodymenia 

divaricata, Laurencia sp., Gracilaria sp., and Enteromorpha jlexuosa; while Hapmafau Bay on the 

south of the Motusa isthmus was dominated by Caulerpa racemosa, Caulerpa serrulata and 

Chlorodesmis major. 

Systematics 

Chlorophyceae 

Ulvales 

Ulvaceae 

Enteromorpha Link in Nees 1820 

Enteromorphaflexuosa (Wulfen) J . Agardh 1883: 126; Taylor 1960: 61; Bliding 1963: 

73, figs 38-40; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 261; Dawes 1974: 67; Ngan and Price 1979: 4; 

Dong and Tseng 1984: 254, pl. 126, fig. 2; Koeman 1985: 166, figs 106-130; Lewis 1987: 4; 

Santelices and Abbott 1987: 5; Silva et al. 1987: 92; Littler et al. 1989: 22; Tsuda 1991: 42, 

Millar and Kraft 19946: 422 

Confervaflexuosa Roth 1800: 188 (type locality: Duino, near Trieste, Adriatic Sea). 

Ulvaflexuosa Wulfen 1803: 1 (nomen novum). 

Enteromorpha intestinalis (Linnaeus) Link var. tubulosa Kiitzing 1845: 247 (type 

locality: freshwater, Germany).

Enteromorpha tubulosa (Kiitzing) Kiitzing 1856: 11, pl. 32, fig. 11; Dawson 1954: 384, 

fig. 6a, b; 1957: 101; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 97; Dong and Tseng 1984: 256, pl. 127, fig. 2; 

Payri and Meinesz 1985~: 509; Abbott 1989: 225. 

Enteromorpha intestinalis (Linnaeus) Link f, tubulosa (Kiitzing) V.J. Chapman 1937: 

229. 

Enteromorpha intermedia Bliding 1955: 262, figs 1-5 (syntype localities: various in 

northern Europe, USA). 

(Fig. 16) 

Plants light-green and fleecy, sparsely branched 150-155 ym in diameter, up to 20 cm 

long. Cells angular, subrectangular up to 25 X 35 pm, arranged in distinct longitudinal rows. 

No pyrenoids seen in specimens collected (perhaps due to formalin preservation). Lateral 

branches often monofilamentous, 25-30 pm in diameter. 

Distribution 

Cosmopolitan. 

Fijian Records 

Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 200; South and Kasahara 1992: 47. 

Rotuman Distribution 

Maka Bay (MAK131 USP 45 1). 

Habitat and Remarks 

Found abundantly within seagrass beds in the bay, in relatively shallow (50-60 cm) and 

warm (30-33°C) waters. The fleecy masses of this alga are often intermingled with 

Sargassum polycystum and other brown and red algae which are abundantly found at this 

site. The high water temperatures and obvious fertility of this area in the Maka Bay may 

explain the absence of pyrenoids in the Enteromorpha collected, as food products may not 

need to be stored in this situation. 

Conferva flexuosa Roth, the intended basionym of Enteromorpha flexuosa (Wulfen) 

J. Agardh is a later homonym of C. flexuosa O.F. Miiller 1782: 5, pl. 882 and hence does not 

have priority. Ulvaflexuosa Wulfen is treated as a nomen novum in accordance with Article 

72, Note 1 of the ICBN (see Silva et al. 1987: 92). 

Cladophorales 

Cladophoraceae 

Cladophora Kiitzing 1843 

Cladophora conferta P. Crouan et H. Crouan in Schramm and Maze 1865: 37 (type 

locality: Guadeloupe) van den Hoek 1982: 173, figs 332-354; Silva et al. 1987: 97. 

Cladophora uncinata Bflrgesen 1913: 20, figs 9, 10 (type locality: St Croix, Virgin 

Island). The synonymy was proposed by van den Hoek (1982: 174). 

(Fig. 8) 

Thallus dark green, 5-10 cm high forming dense compact clumps. Axes non-percurrent, 

pseudodichotomously-trichotomously branched. Segments 70-1 12 pm in diameter, with 

branches laterally inserted with a steeply inclined cross-wall. Ultimate branches with 

rounded apices, 70-75 pm in diameter. Length: width ratio of main axes (5-6). Plants 

remains dark dull-green after drying.


Distribution 

Fiji, tropical Atlantic (Bermuda, Caicos Is., Jamaica, Puerto Rico, Guadeloupe, 

Venezuela, Trinidad, Cura~ao, Ghana). 

Fijian Record 

New record for Fiji. 


Jolmea (Hapmak) (J1/ USP 440, J5/ USP S6: 10, J6/ USP S6: 11). 


Found growing as compact masses at the bottom of a natural hole 50 cm in diameter and 

about 1 m deep on the outer reef; exposed to the air at low tide. The plants were a good 

match for the species described by van den Hoek (1982). 

Rhizoclonium Kutzing 1843 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Rhizoclonium 

1. Filaments 45-82 pm in diameter ............................................ R. africanurn 

1: Filaments 250-320 pm in diameter ............................................ R. grade 

Rhizoclonium afn'canum Kutzing 1853: 21, pl. 67, fig. I1 (type locality: 'Senegambien' 

(Senegal or Gambia)); Womersley and Bailey 1970: 265; Lewis 1987: 15; Silva et al. 1987: 99. 

Rhizoclonium samoense Setchell 1924: 177, fig. 42 (syntype locality: Tutuila Island, 

Samoa)-Dawson 1956: 33, fig. 13a; Trono 1968: 164; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 99; Payri and 

Meinesz 1985a: 510. 

Rhizoclonium hookeri Kutzing (misapplied name fide Womersley and Bailey 1970: 

265)Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 85; 1926: 79; Taylor 1960: 77; Chapman 1961: 74, fig. 80; 

Valet 1968: 34; Dawes 1974: 90; Lewis 1987: 15; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 5; Garrigue 

and Tsuda 1988: 60: Yoshida et al. 1990: 272. 

(Figs 10, 17) 

Filaments light to yellowish green, forming entangled fleecy masses. Individual filaments 

45-82 pm in diameter, the cell walls 17-26 pm thick and stratified. Individual cells 2(4) 

times as long as wide. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Caroline Island, Marshall Island, New Caledonia, Samoa, Solomon Island, Tahiti, 

Easter Island, Philippines, northern Australia, Japan, Jamaica, north-west Africa. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (HAP44tUSP 448); widespread around the coast. 


Attached to rocks and tree roots in the uppermost intertidal. The nomenclature followed 

for this species is that of Womersley and Bailey (1970: 265), who synonymised 

Rhizoclonium samoense Setchell with R, africanum Kutzing after examination of the 

respective type specimens. The Rotuman plants agree well with R, africanum as described 

by Womersley and Bailey (1970: 265) as regards filament diameter (40-80 pm for

R. africanum; 45-82 pm for the Rotuman specimens) and cell 1ength:width ratio. However, 

in view of the divergent interpretations of Rhizocloniurn taxonomy (Womersley and Bailey 

1970; Nienhuis 1975), it is evident that further study of this genus is necessary in order to 

clarify its distribution and nomenclatural status. 

Rhizoclonium grande Bargesen 1935: 14, figs 5,6 (type locality: Bombay, India); 

Jaasund 1976: 5, fig. 12; Silva et al. 1987: 99; Tsuda 1991: 43. 

(Figs 9, 20) 

Filaments bright-green, 250-320 pm in diameter, creeping, with thick stratified cell walls. 

Rhizoids abundant, up to 100 p,m thick at the base, arising from nearly every cell. Individual 

cells 2-3 times as long as wide. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Philippines, Japan, Tanzania. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (*HAP481 USP S4: 4, *HAP491 USP S4: 5). 


Intermingled with small red algae within Valonia aegagropila carpets covering exposed 

rock platforms. 

Siphonocladales 

Boodleaceae 

Boodlea Murray et De Toni 1890 

Boodlea coacta (Dickie) Murray et De Toni in Murray 1889: 245, pl. 49; Valet 1968: 39; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 93; Lewis 1987: 6; Lewis and Norris 1987: 10; Silva et al. 1987: 100; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 56; Tsuda 1991: 40; South and Yen 1992: 127. 

Cladophora coacta Dickie 1876b: 451 (type locality: 'Osima Harbour' (0-Shima, 

Wakayama Prefecture, Japan)). 

(Fig. 19) 

Grows as light green spongy, crispy hemispherical tufts 25-30 mm across. Main filaments 

about 240 pm in diameter, composed of cells 500-560 pm long. Branching irregularly 

lateral, the terminal branchlets 35-65 p,m in diameter. One-celled haptera interconnecting 

branchlets in all planes; branches and cells of fairly uniform size. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Japan, Taiwan, northern Australia, Micronesia, Nauru, Solomon Islands, New 

Caledonia. 

Fijian Record 

New record for Fiji.



Present at most sites. Representative material: Lopta (*L25, *L26/ USP S6: 6, L34/ USP 

420, *L47/ USP S7: 4). 


Back reef, found in tidal pools attached to coral rubble or occupying cavities in Acropora 

heads. 

Struvea Sonder 1845 

Struvea anastornosarts (Harvey) Piccone et Grunow ex Piccone 1884: 20; Borgesen 

1913: 54, Fig. 39; Taylor 1928; Egerod 1952: 359, pl. 31, fig. 4; Dawson 1954: 390, fig. 8g; 

Dawson 1956: 30; 1957: 103; Chapman 1955: 355; Taylor 1960: 122, pl. 15, fig. 1; pl. 19, 

fig. 2; Chapman 1960: 93, fig. 106; Trono 1968: 162; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 270; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 100; Ngan and Price 1979: 5; Dong and Tseng 1984: 276, pl. 137, 

fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 510; Heijs 1987: 147; Lewis 1987: 7; Lewis and Norris 

1987: 10; Silva et al. 1987: 101; Abbott 1989: 225; Tsuda 1991: 43; Wynne 1993: 20. 

Cladophora? anastomosans Harvey 1859: pl. CI (type locality: Fremantle, Western 

Australia). 

Struvea delicatula Kutzing 1866: 1, pl. 2, figs e-g (type locality: New Caledonia); 

Okamura 1908(1907-1909): 203, pl. 40, figs 9-12; Reinbold in Weber-van Bosse 1913: 65; 

Gilbert 1961: 421; Valet 1968: 37; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 100; Lewis 1987: 7; Lewis and 

Norris 1987: 10; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 61. 

(Figs 21, 22) 

Plants densely entangled, thallus up to 15 mm long and 8 mm broad; main axis 

filamentous and up to 440 pm in diameter, segmented in upper portions of stalk with c. 3-5 

pairs of opposite cross-walled branchlet filaments 60-100 pm in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Tuvalu, Solomon Islands, Papua New Guinea, Australia, Hawaii, 

Taiwan, Philippines, China, Jamaica, Maldives. 


Chapman 1971: 165 (as S. delicatula Kutzing); Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 200, fig. 33; 

South and Kasahara 1992: 48. 


Present at most sites. Representative material: Hapmafau (*HAP34/USP S6: 8, 

*HAP35NSP S6: 9). 


Occurs in tide pools, in sheltered back reef locations. 

Siphonocladaceae 

Boergesenia J. Feldmann 1938 

Boergesenia forbesii (Harvey) J. Feldmann 1938: 1503, figs 3-5; Dawson 1954: 388, 

fig. 8d; 1957: 102; Gilbert 1961: 420; Taylor 1966: 347; Trono 1968: 157, pl. 17, fig. 7; 

Valet 1968: 37; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 268; Jaasund 1976: 15, fig. 31; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 93; Dong and Tseng 1984: 272, pl. 135, fig. 3; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507;

Trono 1986: 211, fig. 4; Lewis 1987: 9; Lewis and Norris 1987: 10; Silva et al. 1987: 100; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 56; Tsuda 1991: 40; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 

1992a: 171; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 144; Millar and Kraft 1994b: 431. 

Valonia forbesii Harvey 1860: 333, fig. 8d (syntype localities: Ryukyu-retto, Japan; Sri 

Lanka); Lucas 1935: 197; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 54; Taylor 1950: 41. 

(Fig. 14) 

Plants bright-green, clavate, turgid, and filled with fluid when fresh; obovoid 1-4 cm long 

and up to 1 cm broad, aggregated in groups of 5-10 individuals. Lower portion a tapered 

base c. 3 mm long, with basal rhizoidal attachments. 

Distribution 

Tropical oceans. 


Chapman 1971: 165; Kasahara 1985: 32; 1988; South 1991: 4; South and Kasahara 1992: 

48. 


Hapmafau (HAP17lUSP 334, HAP18NSP 335). 


Found on the sandy back reef in sheltered locations. Sometimes forming extensive 

colonies 1-3 m from the beach, as at Fapufa. 

Cladophoropsis BBrgesen 1905 

Cladophoropsis sundanensis Reinbold 1905: 147 (syntype localities: 'Timor; Laut', 

Indonesia); Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 77, fig. 18; BGrgesen 1934: 8; 1935: 10, fig. 1; 1940: 

21; Gilbert 1946: 77; Dawson 1956: 30, fig. 8; 1957: 102; Gilbert 1961: 424; Womersley and 

Bailey 1970: 268; Jaasund 1976: 11, fig. 24; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 96; Dong and Tseng 

1984: 274, pl. 136 fig. 1; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; Lewis 1987: 10 ('sudanensis'); 

Santelices and Abbott 1987: 5; Silva et al. 1987: 101; Tsuda 1991: 41; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 171; Wynne 1993: 20. 

(Fig. 11) 

Plants tufted, greenish-brown, up to 15 mm high with filaments 60-176 pm in diameter; 

loosely branched with branchlets at 300-500 pm intervals along the main axis. Branches 

non-septate and entangled at the base, secund or irregular and projecting from the distal end 

of the primary axial cells. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Tahiti, Solomon Islands, Easter Island, northern Australia, China, 

Maldives. Tanzania. 

Fijian Record 

Raj 1993: 55. 


Fapufa (*F6/ USP S4: 6), Hapmafau (*HAP361 USP S7: 7), 'Ahau (All USP 447, *A51 

USP S3: 12).

Benthic Marine Algae of Rotuma Island 37 1 


Plants form small mats or clumps in sheltered tidal pools (Fapufa, Hapmafau), where 

filaments reach 100 pm in diameter; or coarser forms in tufts to 15 mm high infiltrated with 

calcareous mud and sand, composed of sometimes laterally anastomosing filaments up to 

176 pm in diameter (at 'Ahau, where it is the dominant algal cover on coral debris along the 

shoreline). 

The Rotuman specimens at 'Ahau closely fit the habitat description by Taylor (1950: 44), 

who most probably refers to this species under C. zollingeri (Kiitzing) Borgesen, as his Bikini 

specimens attain up to 175 pm in diameter. The type specimen of C. zollingeri has filaments 

in the range of 215-315 pm in diameter, in contrast to the filaments of C. sundanensis which 

range from 60-175 pm in diameter (see Howe 1914; Dawson 1956: 31). 

Valoniaceae 

Dictyosphaeria Decaisne ex Endlicher 1843 

Dictyosphaeria cavernosa (Forsskll) Borgesen 1932: 2, pl. 1, fig. 1; Setchell 1935: 261; 

Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 54; Gilbert 1946: 77; Taylor 1950: 43, pl. 27, fig. 2; Egerod 

1952: 350, figs lb-- 2f-g; Dawson 1954: 388, fig. 8i; Chapman 1955: 355; Dawson 1956: 

29; 1957: 102; Moul 1957: 42; Levring 1960: 121; Taylor 1960: 116, pl. 7, fig. 5; Chapman 

1961: 98, fig. 1 l4a, b; Durairatnam 1961: 29; Gilbert 1961: 417; Meiiez 1961: 48; Tsuda 

1964: 6; Taylor 1966: 348; Trono 1968: 157; Tsuda and Trono 1968: 194; Valet 1968: 35; 

Womersley and Bailey 1970: 267; Jaasund 1976: 15, fig. 32; Tsuda 19766: 328; Woelkerling 

1976: 96, Fig. 45; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 96; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 27; Dong and Tseng 

1984: 268, pl. 133, fig. 5; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; Trono 1986: 212, fig. 5; Lewis 

1987: 7; Lewis and Norris 1987: 10; Silva et al. 1987: 101; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 59; 

Abbott 1989: 225; Littler et al. 1989: 62; Tsuda 1991: 42; Coppejans and Prud'homme van 

Reine 1992a: 171; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 28; South and Yen 1992: 127; Verheij and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 144; Millar and Kraft 1994b: 431. 

Ulva cavernosa Forsskll 1775: 187 (syntype localities: 'Gomfodae' (Al-Qunfidha), Saudi 

Arabia; Mokha, Yemen). 

Valonia favulosa C. Agardh 1822a: 432 (type locality: 'Ravak' (Lawak); Waigeo Island, 

Moluccas, Indonesia). 

Dictyosphaeria favulosa (C. Agardh) Decaisne ex Endlicher 1843: 18; Dickie 1876: 244; 

Okamura 1908(1907-1909): 205, pl. 40, figs 13-204; Lucas 1935: 196; Lewis 1987: 7. 

(Fig. 12) 

Plants green, sessile, c. 2-5 cm in diameter; sometimes spherical and often irregularly 

lobed. Thallus hollow, the walls 1 cell thick, with angular or polygonal cells clearly seen 

with the naked eye. Lightly attached to substratum via small rhizoids. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 165 (as D. favulosa (C. Agardh) Decaisne); Kapraun and Bowden 1978; 

Kasahara 1985: 34; 1988; South and Kasahara 1992: 48. 


Common at all sites. Representative material: Hapmafau (L391 USP 418); Lopta (L331 

USP 419, L401 USP 480).


Found in sheltered back reef sites, often underneath flat coral rubble and in tide pools. 

Valonia C. Agardh 1822 

Valonia aegagropila C. Agardh 1822a: 429 (lectotype locality: Venezia, Italyfide Egerod 

1952: 348); J. Agardh 1887: 99; Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 60; Taylor 1950: 41; Egerod 1952: 

348, pl. 29b; Dawson 1954: 388, fig. 8j; Chapman 1955: 355; Dawson 1956: 28; 1957: 101; 

Moul 1957: 44; Levring 1960: 121; Taylor 1960: 1 1 1, pl. 17, fig. 6; Chapman 1961: 98, fig. 

11 1; Gilbert 1961: 418; Tsuda 1964: 7; Taylor 1966: 347; Trono 1968: 156; 1986: 212, fig. 

6; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 266; Jaasund 1976: 15, fig. 29; Taylor 1977: 8; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 100; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 33; Ngan and Price 1979: 5; Dong and Tseng 

1984: 270, pl. 134, fig. 3; Lewis 1987: 8; Lewis and Norris 1987: 11; Silva et al. 1987: 102; 

Olsen and West 1988: 104, fig. 6; Abbott 1989: 225; Littler et al. 1989: 58; Tsuda 1991: 44; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 171; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 28; South and 

Yen 1992: 127; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 145, pl. 8, fig. 3. 

(Fig. 15a, b) 

Thallus encrusting, dark to light olive-green, composed of vesicle-like subclavate 

segments 3-13 mm long and 2-5 mm broad, subdichotomously branched from the sides or 

the ends of the cells. Young plants attached to each other, the older ones more or less free. 

Can form thick encrusting mats up to 10 mm thick over many m2 of back reef rocks. 

Distribution 



Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 200; Kasahara 1985: 35, pl. 5, fig. 3; 1988; South and 

Kasahara 1992: 48. 


Hapmafau (HAP221 USP 343, HAP231 USP 344). 


Smaller specimens (1-2 mm long) form extremely dense encrusting mats on exposed 

beach rocks in backreef sites (eg. Hapmafau). The Valonia mats are typically covered with 

dark green Cyanophyceae (Lyngbya sp.) and offer a micro-habitat for a large variety of 

smaller red, green and blue-green algae (e.g. Heterosiphonia, Cladophora, Ceramium). The 

larger plants (3-5 mm long) are typically found in more or less free clusters at the base of 

rocks and coral rubble in sandy back reef sites. 

Ventricaria Olsen et West 1988 

Ventricaria ventricosa (J. Agardh) Olsen et West 1988: 104; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 

61; Littler et al. 1989: 56; Tsuda 1991: 44 (as Ventricularia ventricosa); Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 172; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 28; Verheij and Prud'homme 

van Reine 1993: 146; Wynne 1993: 21. 

Valonia ventricosa J. Agardh 1887: 96 (syntype localities: St. Croix, Virgin Island; 

Guadeloupe); Okamura 1936(1933-1942): 32, fig. 13; Egerod 1952: 347, pl. 29a; Dawson 

1954: 388, fig. 8e; Dawson 1956: 28; 1957: 101; Chapman 1955: 355; Levring 1960: 121; 

Taylor 1960: 110, pl. 9, figs 4-5; 1966: 347; Chapman 1961: 95, fig. 109; Meiiez 1961: 48; 

Trono 1968: 155; Valet 1968: 35; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 267; Dawes 1974: 92;


Jaasund 1976: 13, fig. 27; Woelkerling 1976: 100, fig. 65; Chapman 1977: 161; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 100; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 35; Dong and Tseng 1984: 272, pl. 135, fig. 1; 

Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 510; Trono 1986: 213, fig. 7; Lewis 1987: 8; Santelices and 

Abbott 1987: 5; Silva et al. 1987: 103; Abbott 1989: 225. 

(Fig. 23) 

Plants coenocytic and thin-walled dark green in colour, subsperical, up to 25 mm in 

diameter. Grows solitarily or in groups of 3 or 4; attached basally to the substratum by 

minute rhizoids. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 165 (as Valonia ventricosa J. Agardh); Kasahara 1985: 36; 1988 (as 

Valonia ventricosa J. Agardh); South 1991: 4; South and Kasahara 1992: 49. 


Hof6a (H2211 USP 345). 


Plants occur on back reef, under flat pieces of coral rubble. 

Bryopsidales 

Bryopsidaceae 

Bryopsis Lamouroux 1809 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Bryopsis 

1. Plants not tufted, in compact clumps 12-20 mm high; branchlets in a pair of offset lateral rows on 

one side of the primary axis ............................................... B. harveyana 

1: Plants tufted, in lax clumps to 6 cm tall; branchlets in 2 opposite rows along central axis .......... 

....................................................................... B. plu~no~a 

Bryopsis harveyana J. Agardh 1887: 82; Okamura 1931: 100; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 

60; Borgesen 1946: 36, Fig. 13; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 94; Dong and Tseng 1984: 280, pl. 

139, fig. 1; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; Lewis and Norris 1987: 10; Garrigue and Tsuda 

1988: 57; Tsuda 1991: 40. 

Bryopsisplumosa var. secunda Harvey 1858: 31, pl. 45A, figs 1-3 (type locality: Friendly 

Islands,fide J. Agardh 1887: 22). 

(Fig. 48) 

Thallus dark iridescent green; in compact clumps 12-20 mm high and 15 mm broad; main 

axis 195-200 pm in diameter and unbranched, with slight upward curvature. Secondary 

branches cylindrical to clavate, up to 1000 km long and 85 pm broad, with rounded apex 

and slight constriction (35-41 pm) at base. Branchlets occurring in an offset pair of lateral 

rows on one side of the primary axis, giving a uniseriate appearance to the thallus. Secondary 

branchlets typically longer in middle of axis, imparting a renoid curvature to the younger 

blades.

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Tahiti, Ryukyu Islands, Taiwan, China. 


Kasahara 1985: 31, pl. 4, fig. 6; pl. 14, fig.f; 1988; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 

1992: 49. 


Maka Bay, Lopta (L141 USP 336, *L32/ USP S6: 19). 


Found as small isolated clumps on the outer reef crest, subject to heavy wave action. 

Strongly attached to rocks via rhizoids. 

Bryopsisplumosa (Hudson) C. Agardh 1822a: 448; Harvey 1846: pl. 3; Kutzing 1856: 29, 

fig. 83; Dickie 1874; Bargesen 1913: 20; Lucas 1935: 198; Taylor 1960: 131, pl. 9, fig. 11; 

Chapman 1961: 132, fig. 153; Dawes 1974: 73; Kermarrec 1974: 21, pl.1, fig. A; Rietema 

1975: 8-24, pls 1-9; Haritonidis and Tsekos 1976: 278; Woelkerling 1976: 86, figs 9-14; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 94; Dong and Tseng 1984: 280, pl. 139, fig. 2; Womersley 1984: 282, 

figs 96C, 97A; Lewis 1987: 17; Lewis and Norris 1987: 10; Silva et al. 1987: 103; Garrigue 

and Tsuda 1988: 57; Littler et al. 1989: 30; Lee et al. 1991: 24, figs 1A-E, 4A; Tsuda 1991: 

40; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 11 7; Millar and Kraft 19946: 424. 

Ulva plumosa Hudson 1762: 571 (type locality: Exmouth, Devonshire, England). 

Bryopsis arbuscula Murray 1889. 

(Figs 49,60) 

Plants erect and tufted, up to 6 cm tall, translucent olive-green with bluish iridescence on 

main branch axes, composed of fine plumose branchlets in 2 opposite rows along a central 

axis 175-178 pm thick. Lateral branchlets to 110 pm in diameter and 2-2.5 mm broad, 

obtuse at apex, with secondary branchlets 35 pm at centre and constricted (29-30 km) at 

base. Main axis of plants naked below, with basal rhizoids, above pyramidally branched. 

Distribution 

New Caledonia, Micronesia, Lord Howe Island, Australia, Philippines, Ryukyu Island, 

China, Taiwan, Korea, Jamaica, tropical Americas, England, France, Greece, Italy, 

Netherlands. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (HAP191 USP 337, HAP201 USP 338, *HAP281 USP S6: 17, *HAP371 USP 

S6: 18). 


Found attached to rocky platforms on back reef at Hapmafau, typically occupying small 

surge channels in association with tufts of superficially similar-looking plants of 

Chlorodesmis hildebrandtii; however, the Bryopsis plants can be distinguished by the bluish 

iridescence along their main axes.

Benthic Marine Algae of Rotuma Island 

Caulerpaceae 

Caulerpa Lamouroux 1809: 136 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Caulerpa 

(Adapted in part from South and N'Yeurt 1993) 

1. Branchlets usually stalked, the ends generally sharply swollen ............................ .6 

1: Branchlets not stalked, ends not swollen ........................................... .2-5 

2. Assimilators flattened or compressed, not spirally twisted .................. C. cupressoides 

2: Assimilators angular to compressed, spirally twisted ......................... C. serrulata 

3. Assimilators spirally twisted, marginal teeth about twice as long as broad ...................... 

................................................. C. serrulata var. typica f. serrulata 

3: Assimilators straight or only slightly spirally twisted, marginal teeth shorter than broad ........... 

............................................. C. serrulata var. boryarza f. occideiztalis 

4. Axes not dichotomous, branchlets not distichous ......................... C. cupressoides 

4: Assimilators dichotomous, nearly all distichous ..... C. cupressoides var. lycopodiuiiz f. elegaizs 

5. Plants large, sparingly branched; assimilators in several ranks ............................... 

............................................ C. cupressoides var. typica f. lycopodiurn 

5: Plants small, branching bushy, assimilators arranged in 5 or more ranks ....................... 

.................................................... C. cupressoides var. mamillosa 

6. Ends of branchlets terminating abruptly in a peltate disk, or with trumpet-shaped branchlets with 

concave, flattened ends ........................................................ .7 

6: Ends of branchlets generally swollen, varying from nearly cylindrical to clavate, subspherical or 

terminally flattened ........................................................... .8 

7. Ends of branchlets terminating abruptly in a peltate disk, plants small; branchlets few ............ 

......................................................... C. racernosa var. peltata 

7: Ends of branchlets trumpet-shaped, flattened, plants larger, branchlets moderately to densely radially 

arranged ................................................... C. racernosa var. turbinata 

8. Branchlets 20-30 mm high, not corpulent; ends of branchlets subspherical and inflated, 2-4 mm 

in diameter, laxly beset about foliar axis ........................ C. raceiizosa var. clavifera 

8: Branchlets 10-20 mm high, corpulent; ends of branchlets club to trumpet-shaped, 1-2 mm in 

diameter, compact, very densely beset about foliar axis ............. C. raceiizosa var. uvtfera 

Caulerpa cupressoides (Vahl) C. Agardh 1823: 441; Okamura 1923: 194, pl. 200, fig. 2 

(as var. typica); Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 61 (var. typica); S. Yamada 1940; Chapman 

1955: 355 (var. typica); Taylor 1960: 146, pl. 14, figs 3,4, Fig. 6; pl. 15, figs 1-4; pl. 18, figs 

11-13; 1966; Chapman 1961: 142, fig. 167 (var. typica); Durairatnam 1961: 28; Trono 1968: 

170, pl. 14, fig. 8, pl. 15, fig. 3; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 274; Dawes 1974: 74; Taylor 

1977: 4; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 94; Meiiez and Calumpong 1982: 6, pl. 1, figs B, C; Dong 

and Tseng 1984: 280, pl. 139, fig. 4; Trono 1986: 214, fig. 9; Silva et al. 1987: 104; Gamgue 

and Tsuda 1988: 57; Littler et al. 1989: 48; Coppejans and Beeckman 1990: 113, figs 3-7; 

Tsuda 1991: 40; Coppejans 1992: 389, fig. 1C; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 

1992a: 172; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992b: 676, fig. 2A, 8A; South and Yen 

1992: 127; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 121, pl. 1, fig. 2. 

Fucus cupressoides Vahl 1802: 38 (type locality: St Croix, Virgin Islands). 

(Fig. 24) 

Plants forming dense aggregations, with a smooth spreading stolon up to 30 cm long and 

3 mm in diameter, anchored by numerous rhizoid-bearing branches spaced at close 

(0.5-1 cm) intervals. Foliar axes up to 4 cm tall, often strongly forked with sub-dichotomous 

branching. Ramelli oppositely pinnate and terete, with upward curving tendency, tapering to 

a sharp point at the tip, and generally twice as long as the diameter of the supporting axis. 

The ramelli usually arranged in ranks of 3s, sometimes 2s or up to 5. 


Chapman 1977: 161; Kasahara 1988; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 49; South 

and N'Yeurt 1993: 112, fig. 7.

376 A. D. R. N'Yeurt 

Caulerpa cupressoides (Vahl) C. Agardh var. typica f, lycopodium (J. Agardh) Weber- 

van Bosse 1898: 335, pl. 27 figs 8-13; pl. 28, figs 10-12, fig. 14; Taylor 1960: 147, pl. 14, 

fig. 3; Chapman 1961: 145 (f. typica Weber-van Bosse); Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; 

Lewis 1987: 21; Silva et al. 1987: 105; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 57; Littler et al. 1989: 48; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 173. 

Caulerpa lycopodium J. Agardh 1847: 6 (syntype localities: Brazil; West Indies). 

(Fig. 33) 

Erect axes up to 4 cm tall, spaced at relatively wide (2-3 cm) intervals along spreading 

stolon. The ramelli usually in ranks of 3s, sometimes 2s, oppositely pinnate with mucronate, 

upward-curving branchlets up to 1 mm long. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Tahiti, northern Australia, Philippines, Indonesia, Jamaica, tropical 

Americas. 


Chapman 197 1: 166; Kasahara (in Herb. Kyoto University, Faculty of Agriculture); South 

1992: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 49; South and N'Yeurt 1993: 114, fig. 8. 


Hapmafau (HAP101 USP 359, HAP151 USP 360) 


Found growing in back reef areas at Hapmafau. Usually attached to vertical faces of rocky 

platforms that are subject to a fair amount of wave action, and occurs together with other 

species of Caulerpa as well as Chlorodesmis major and Halimeda opuntia clumps. 

Caulerpa cupressoides (Vahl) C. Agardh var. lycopodium (J. Agardh) Weber-van Bosse) 

f. elegans (P. Crouan and H. Crouan) Weber-van Bosse 1898: 336, pl. 27, figs 8,9; Okamura 

1923: 194, pl. 200, fig. 3; Taylor 1960: 148, pl. 15, figs 2, 3; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; 

Silva et al. 1987: 105; Coppejans 1992: 391, fig. 1A; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 

1992a: 173; 1992b: 679, fig. 2E, 11A; South andN'Yeurt 1993: 115, fig. 11. 

Caulerpa plumaris (Forsskbl) C. Agardh var. elegans P. Crouan et H. Crouan in Schramm 

and MazC 1865: 39 (type locality: Guadeloupe). 

(Figs 26, 34) 

Plants relatively small, the spreading stolon about 1 mm in diameter and vivid green in 

colour, even after drying. The foliar axes occur at 0.5-1 cm intervals along the creeping 

stolon, strongly forked with the distance between sub-dichotomies as little as 2 mm in the 

upper parts of the plant. The ramelli thin, oppositely pinnate and in ranks of 2 along a 

relatively broad (0.8-1 mm) central axis. The branchlets mucronate with apiculate, upward 

curving tips. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Tahiti, Papua New Guinea, Philippines, Indonesia, tropical Americas. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (HAP91 USP 361).



Found growing in intimate association with var. typica in back reef areas at Hapmafau. 

Quite rare, but conspicuous by its more fragile looking habit and vivid green colour. 

Caulerpa cupressoides (Vahl) C. Agardh var. mamillosa (Montagne) Weber-van Bosse 

1898: 332, pl. 28, figs 2-7 (syntype localities: Galega and Manga-Reva Islands, Solomon 

Islands); Borgesen 1907: 368, fig. 13; 1913: 135, fig. 108; Setchell 1935: 261, pls 11-15; 

Levring 1960: 122; Taylor 1960: 148, pl. 15, fig. 4; pl. 18, fig. 11; Chapman 1961: 144, fig. 

169; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 275; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; Coppejans 1992: 

391; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 173; 19926: 679, fig. 3A, 8B; Millar and 

Kraft 1994b: 436. 

Caulerpa mamillosa Montagne 1838. 

(Figs 25,35) 

Plants stout and bushy, erect foliar axes closely spaced at 0.5-1 cm intervals along a 

relatively thick spreading stolon up to 2.5 mm in diameter. The foliar axes several times 

forked very early from the base, bearing mucronate, obvoid to subnavicular ramelli in 

several ranks. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Solomon Islands, Tahiti, Papua New Guinea, Indonesia, Jamaica, tropical Americas. 

Fijian Record 

South andN'Yeurt 1993: 116, fig. 10. 


Hapmafau (HAP141 USP 362, HAP161 USP 363). 


Found on vertical rocky platforms in back reef locations at a lower level than other 

Caulerpa species. Plants are conspicuous by their stout appearance and bushy habit. 

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskil) J. Agardh 1873: 35; Lucas 1935: 199; Gilbert 1946: 78; 

Egerod 1952: 369; Taylor 1960: 151, pl. 17, figs 1, 3, 4, 6, 7; pl. 18, figs 2-5, fig. 7; 

Chapman 1961: 145; Meiiez 1961: 51; Taylor 1966: 350; Trono 1968: 171, pl. 14, fig. 9, pl. 

16, fig. 7; Dawes 1974: 77, fig. 32; Tsuda 1976b: 327; Chapman 1977: 161; Taylor 1977: 8; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 95; Meiiez and Calumpong 1982: 7; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; 

Trono 1986: 217, fig. 13; Lewis 1987: 22; Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 106; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 57; Abbott 1989: 226; Coppejans and Beeckman 1989: 384; 

Coppejans 1992: 401, figs 4C-D; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992b: 698, figs 

18A-B; Littler et al. 1989: 44; Tsuda 1991: 41; South and Yen 1992: 127 (var. macrophysa); 

Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 122, pl. 1, figs 8, 9, pl. 2, figs 1-6; Millar and 

Kraft 19946: 439. 

Fucus racemosa Forsskdl 1775: 191 (type locality: Suez, Egypt). 

(Figs 28, 36) 


Kasahara 1988; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 49; South and N'Yeurt 1993: 

124, fig. 19.

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskil) J. Agardh var. clavifera (Turner) Weber-van Bosse 1898: 

361, pl. 33, figs 1-3; Okamura 1913: 66, pl. 119, fig. 1 (f. macrophysa); 1931: 102; Yamada 

and Tanaka 1938: 60 (f. 'microphysa'); Gilbert 1942: 18; 1946: 78; Taylor 1950: 62; 

Dawson 1957: 106, fig. 9c; Taylor 1960: 152, pl. 17, fig. 7; pl. 18, fig. 3; Chapman 1961: 

146, fig. 171; Gilbert 1961: 437; Jaasund 1976: 25, fig. 50; Meiiez and Calumpong 1982: 7, 

pl. 2A; Dong and Tseng 1984: 282, pl. 140, fig. 4; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507; Lewis 

1987: 23; Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 57; Abbott 1989: 226; 

Coppejans and Beeckman 1989: 384, fig. 4. 

Fucus clavifer Turner 1808: 126 (type locality: Red Sea). 

Caulerpa clavifera (Turner) C. Agardh 1817: 23; Dickie 1874: 197; 1876: 244; Howe 

1932: 169. 

Chauvinia clavifera (Turner) Bory de St Vincent 1829 (1826-1829): 207. 

(Figs 28,36) 

Plants up to 15 cm long, with spreading stolon 3 mm in diameter and ventral branchlets 

beset with rhizoids. Ascending foliar axes up to 3 cm long, bearing up to 15 radially disposed 

stipitate ramelli with subspherical inflated ends 2-4 mm in diameter. Colour dark to light 

green, the larger plants noticeably paler in hue. Some plants (especially those in sandy 

locations) are provided with extensive rhizoids up to 15 mm long, covering c. 30% of the 

spreading stolon. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 166; South and Kasahara 1992: 49. 


Fapufa (F41 USP 412); Hapmafau (HAP131 USP 366, HAP261 USP 368); Lopta (L21 USP 

365, L51 USP 370); Maka Bay (MAK21 USP 364, MAK61 USP 367, MAK101 USP 414). 


This plant is found in relatively sheltered, mainly sandy locations in the back reef, or as 

an epiphyte on large Halimeda opuntia clumps or coral heads. At Isilepi, extensive growth of 

this variety occurs on sand-covered coral heads together with C. serrulata. Smaller plants 

can be concealed within coral rubble on the middle reef, or within thick Chlorodesmis major 

or Dictyota friabilis mats. Mainly found in back reef locations such as Hapmafau and Maka 

Bay, where they attain large sizes. 

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskil) J. Agardh var. peltata (Lamouroux) Eubank 1946: 42 1, 

fig. 2r, s; Gilbert 1961: 439; Tsuda 1964: 5; Meiiez and Calumpong 1982: 8, pl. 2K, Lewis 

1987: 22; Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 108; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 58; 

Abbott 1989: 226; Coppejans and Beeckman 1989: 388, figs 27-29; Littler et al. 1989: 46; 

Coppejans 1992: 401; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 173; 1992b: 696, fig. 

17B; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 28; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 124, pl. 2, fig. 

4; Wynne 1993: 22. 

Caulerpa peltata Lamouroux 1809b: 332 (type locality: Antilles); Dickie 1876: 244; 

Weber-van Bosse 1898: 373, pl. 31, fig. 9; 1913a: 110; 1931: 102; 1932 (1929-1932): 60, 

pl. 280, figs 10-12 (var. typica); Lucas 1935: 199; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 61 

(var. typica); Gilbert 1942: 22 (var. typica); Taylor 1950: 65; Dawson 1956: 35, fig. 16b; 

1957: 106; Taylor 1960: 155, pl. 17, fig. 2; pl. 18, fig. 1; Chapman 1961: 149, fig. 177; 

Durairatnam 1961: 27; Taylor 1966: 350 (var. peltata); Trono 1968: 169, pl. 14, fig. 3;


Womersley and Bailey 1970: 275; Dawes 1974: 75; Jaasund 1976: 27, fig. 53; Taylor 1977: 

8; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 94; Dong and Tseng 1984: 282, pl. 140, fig. 3; Payri and 

Meinesz 1985~: 507; Trono 1986: 216, figs 11, 12; South and Yen 1992: 127; Millar and 

Kraft 1994b: 438. 

Caulerpa peltata Lamouroux f. nummularia (Harvey) Dawson 1957: 106, fig. 10. 

Caulerpapeltata Lamouroux var. nummularia (Harvey) Weber-van Bosse 1898: 376. 

Caulerpa peltata Harvey (see Tsuda 1991: 41). 

(Figs 3 1, 37) 

Plants typically small and occurring as single stolons up to 1 mm in diameter, 

occasionally forming clumps 5-10 cm across of densely intermingled plants, each c. 8 cm 

long and sparingly provided with short rhizoidal branches. Spreading stolon bearing short 

cylindrical erect foliar axes 1-1.5 cm long at 2-3 mm intervals, these producing thin peltate 

discs 3-5 mm in diameter either singly at the end, or several discs axially arranged around 

the main foliar branches. 

Distribution 



Kasahara 1985: 30; Kasahara 1988; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 50; South 

and N'Yeurt 1993: 128, fig. 23. 


Hapmafau (HAP81 USP 372); Lopta (L8); Maka Bay (MAK11 USP 371, MAKSI USP 369). 


Typically found in cryptic locations, such as creeping over staghorn coral rubble or 

hidden under rocks on inner reef. Where it occurs in sheltered back reef sites (e.g. 

Hapmafau, Maka Bay) it can form distinct clumps or mats up to 15 cm diameter over sand- 

covered rocks or smooth substrata. Many plants examined showed distinct dent-like grazing 

marks on the disc edges. 

Sometimes classified as a separate species, there occurs a range of intermediate forms 

between Caulerpa racemosa var. peltata and var. turbinata. While the line of distinction 

between these forms varies amongst authors, the variety described here occupies the peltate 

extreme of the range, with unmistakable thin disc-like ramuli. There is still debate as to 

whether the varietal status of C. racemosa var. peltata is valid, with some authors (e.g. 

Millar and Kraft 1994b) preferring to consider Caulerpa peltata a distinct species pending 

DNA studies on the type or authentic specimens. 

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskbl) J. Agardh var. turbinata (J. Agardh) Eubank 1946: 420, 

fig. 20q; Dawson 1956: 35, fig. 16a; Taylor 1960: 152; Tsuda 1964: 5; Taylor 1977: 10; 

Lewis 1987: 24; Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 108; Abbott 1989: 226; 

Coppejans and Beeckman 1989: 386, figs 24-26; Coppejans 1992: 401; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 174; 19926: 698, fig. 19A, B; South and N'Yeurt 1993: 129, 

fig. 24; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 124, pl. 2, fig. 6; Wynne 1993: 22. 

Caulerpa clavifera (Turner) C. Agardh var. turbinata J. Agardh 1837: 173 (type locality: 

near Tor, Sinai Peninsula, Egypt). 

Caulerpa chemnitzia (Esper) Lamouroux; Svedelius 1906; Durairatnam 1961: 28. 

Fucus chemnitzia Esper 1800: 167 (given as '127'), pl. LXXXVIII (type locality: Malabar 

Coast, India).

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskll) J. Agardh var. chemnitzia (Esper) Weber-van Bosse 1898: 

370, pl. 3 1, figs 5-8; Gilbert 1961: 437; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 507. 

(Fig. 29) 

Plants characteristically lacking a well-defined spreading stolon, the ramelli up to 1.5 mm 

long and trumpet-shaped with concave, flattened ends 1-3 mm in diameter and radially 

disposed in dense fashion around foliar branches up to 25 mm in length. This variety is 

intermediate between var. clavifera and var. peltata. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Tahiti, Papua New Guinea, northern Australia, Indonesia, Hawaii, 

Philippines, Taiwan, tropical Americas, India. 

Fijian Record 



Lopta (L3/ USP 374, L13/ USP 373, L22/ USP 413). 


Found in relatively exposed locations on outer reef, growing together with var. uvifera. 

Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskll) J. Agardh var. uvifera (Turner) J. Agardh 1816: 81; 

Weber-van Bosse 1898: 362, pl. 33, figs 6, 7; fig. 23; 1913a: 105; Taylor 1928: 102, pl. 12, 

fig. 6; pl. 13, fig. 3; 1950: 63; 1960: 153, pl. 17, fig. 3; pl. 18, fig. 4; Dawson 1957: 106; 

Chapman 1961: 148, fig. 174; Gilbert 1961: 440; Valet 1968: 45, pl. 7, fig. 2; Womersley 

and Bailey 1970: 276; Mefiez and Calumpong 1982: 9, pl. 20; Lewis 1987: 24; Garrigue and 

Tsuda 1988: 58. 

Fucus uvifer Turner 1816: 8, pl. 230 (type locality: Red Sea). 

Caulerpa uvifera C. Agardh 18 17: 23. 

Caulerpa uvifera (Turner) Svedelius 1906a: 122, figs 15-1 7; Durairatnam 1961 : 27. 

Caulerpa racemosa var. uvifera Weber-van Bosse; Okamura 1932 (1929-1932): 53, pl. 

280, figs 7, 8; Chapman 1955: 355. 

(Fig. 27a, b) 

Plants forming clumps up to 15 cm in diameter, composed of numerous small spreading 

stolons with relatively short (1-1.5 cm) assimilators densely beset with imbricate ramelli up 

to 1.5 mm in diameter, disposed radially around the foliar axis. Ramelli club to trumpet 

shaped, with a semi-hemispherical and somewhat flattened end borne on a distinct stalk up to 

2.3 mm long. This dense arrangement of small ramelli imparts a distinctive grape-like 

appearance to the clusters of plants. 

Distribution 

Tropical Pacific and Indian Oceans, 


Chapman 1971: 166; Kasahara 1985: 31; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 50. 


Lopta (L6/ USP 375, L12/ USP 376).



Found in generally exposed locations, growing in dense circular clumps on the outer reef, 

often epizoic on living soft coral heads. Where it occurs together with var. clavifera, the 

latter tends to occupy the back reef area while var. uvifera dominates the outer reef face, 

sometimes forming a cover several m2 in area, as at Lopta. This alga is edible, and used in 

traditional Rotuman dishes as a salad with coconut milk and lemon juice. It is locally known 

as lum ne Po. 

Intermediate variety between Caulerpa racemosa (Forsskbl) J. Agardh var, turbinata and 

var. peltata: Coppejans and Beeckman 1989: 391, pl. 4, fig. 29; Coppejans 1992: 403; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992b: 701, fig, 17A; South and N'Yeurt 1993: 130, 

fig. 25. 

Plants up to 3 cm long, with no distinct spreading stolon; the foliar branches bearing 

peltate to sub-discoid or turbinate, terminally inflated ramelli, often on the same branch. 

There exists a great variety of intermediate forms between the ramelli on a single plant, from 

characteristically dentate and undulated discs 1.3-1.5 mm in diameter to turbinate, trumpet- 

shaped ramelli up to 1 mm in diameter. However, the peltate ramelli are slightly thicker than 

in var. peltata, while the turbinate ramelli have somewhat more flattened ends than occurs in 

var, turbinata. Hence, it appears to be a distinct intermediate variety, with branchlets 

numerous on a single upright axis. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Papua New Guinea, Indonesia, Kenya. 

Fijian Record 



Lopta (L9/ USP 442). 


Generally found on the outer reef, together with var. uvifera and var. turbinata, where it is 

more abundant than the latter. 

Caulerpa serrulata (Forsskbl) J. Agardh 1837: 174; Gilbert 1942: 14 (incl. var. typica f. 

serrulata); 1946: 78; Eubank 1946: 418, fig. 2h-j; Taylor 1950: 57, pl. 30, fig. 1; 1960: 145, 

pl. 14, fig. 5; 1966: 351; 1977: 10 (as var. serrulata); Egerod 1952: 369; Dawson 1954: 393, 

fig. 10a; 195d: 38, fig. 23; 1957: 105; Moul 1957: 41; 1959: 164; Gilbert 1961: 440; Meiiez 

1961: 53; Trono 1968: 169, pl. 14, figs 1-2; pl. 16, fig. 4, 8; pl. 17, fig. 9; Valet 1968: 43, pl. 

9, fig. 1; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 276; Jaasund 1976: 23, fig. 48; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 

95; Meiiez and Calumpong 1982: 9, pl. 2E, Dong and Tseng 1984: 284, pl. 141, fig. 1; Payri 

and Meinesz 1985a: 507; Trono 1986: 218, fig. 14; Lewis 1987: 24; Lewis and Norris 1987: 

9; Silva et al. 1987: 108; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 58; Abbott 1989: 226; Coppejans and 

Beeckman 1989: 120, figs 24, 25; Littler et al. 1989: 44; Tsuda 1991: 41; Coppejans 1992: 

403; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 174; 19926: 701, fig. 20B; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 28; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 125, pl. 2, fig. 8. 

Fucus serrulatus Forsskbl 1775: 189 (type locality: Mokha, Yemen). 

Caulerpa freycinetii C. Agardh 1822a: 446 (type locality Manana 1.) (see Berrgesen 1932: 

5); Weber-van Bosse 1898: 310, pl. 25, figs 4-11; pl. 26, fig. 1-6; 1913a: 102; Okamura 

1913: 18, pl. 105, figs 1-3 (var. typica f. lata); 1931: 101; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 94; Lewis 

and Norris 1987: 9 (as var. freycinetti f. lata Weber-van Bosse).


(Figs 32, 38, 39) 

Fairly large plants, with spreading stolon up to 20 cm long and 2 mm wide, possessing 

ventral rhizoid-bearing branches and assimilators up to 7 cm tall at 1-4 cm intervals along 

the spreading stolon. The foliar branches several times dichotomously or irregularly 

branched, terete below up to point of dichotomy, the rest compressed (1-2 mm broad) with 

moderate to strong twisting and serrated margins; the serrations more pronounced on the 

outwardly facing edge of the twist. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 166; Kasahara 1985: 26; 1988; South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 

50; South and N'Yeurt 1993: 117, fig. 12; in Herb Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 623619; 

623625). 


Isilepi (I11 USP 380); Lopta (L71 USP 379); Maka Bay (MAK3/ USP 377, MAKW USP 

378). 


Found on sandy substrata in relatively shallow (20-40 cm) waters in the back reef area, 

typically creeping in the sand with only the erect foliar axes protruding. The strong degree of 

twisting and serrations may offer an advantage to the plant by increasing grazing difficulty, 

although this opinion has to be substantiated with evidence. 

Caulerpa serrulata (Forsskll) J. Agardh var. boryana (J. Agardh) Gilbert f, occidentalis 

(Weber-van Bosse) Yamada et Tanaka 1938: 62; Taylor 1950: 60; 1960: 146; Meiiez and 

Calumpong 1982: 9, pl. 2F; Silva et al. 1987: 109; Coppejans 1992: 403, fig. 7; South and 

N'Yeurt 1993: 118, fig. 13. 

Caulerpa freycinetii (C. Agardh) var. boryana f. occidentalis Weber-van Bosse 1898: 

3 15, pl. 25, fig. 11 (type locality: Guadeloupe); Okamura 1913: 19, pl. 105, figs 4-6. 

Caulerpa hummii Diaz-Piferrer 1969: 13, fig. 1 (type locality: Orquilla Island, 

ArchipiClago Los Hermanos, Venezuela); Taylor 1977: 1 1, 12. 

(Figs 30,40) 

Plants up to 10 cm long, the spreading stolon about 1 mm in diameter and possessing 

numerous rhizoid-bearing branches on the underside, and erect, mostly non-twisted 

dichotomously branched foliar axes above. The foliar branches up to 5 cm tall and 4 mm 

broad, with serrations at 0.5-0.8 mm intervals along the edges. Some vaguely twisted 

branches may occasionally occur on the same stolon. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Papua New Guinea, Philippines. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (HAP1 11 USP 38 1).



- 

Pound on the back reef, in relatively protected sandy locations, often mixed with other 

Caulerpa varieties. 

Codiaceae 

Codium Stackhouse 1797 

Key to the Rotuqan Species of Codium 

1. Thallus aplanate and convoluted ............................................ C. arabicum 

1: Thallus terete or globular, not convoluted ............................................. .2 

2. Thallus terete. ...................................................... C. bulbopilium 

2: Thallus globular. ........................................................... C. sp. 

Codium arabicum Kiitzing 1856: 35, pl. 100, fig. 2 (type locality: Tor, Sinai Peninsula, 

Gulf of Suez, Egypt); Egerod 1952: 382, pl. 34b, figs 11-13; Dawson 1956: 38, fig. 24; 

1957: 107; Trono 1968: 190, pl. 15, fig. 4; Valet 1968; Trono 1973: 221; 1973c: 13, fig. 5; 

1986: 24, fig. 25; Jaasund 1976: 33, fig. 66; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 96; Magruder and Hunt 

1979: 25; Jones and Kraft 1984: 255, figs 1-2; Dong and Tseng 1984: 296, pl. 147, fig. 2; 

Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; Heijs 1987: 147; Lewis 1987: 17; Lewis and Norris 1987: 8; 

Silva et al. 1987: 11 1; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 59; Abbott 1989: 225; Yoshida et al. 1990: 

274; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 50; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 

1993: 127, pl. 3, fig. 5; Millar and Kraft 1994b: 432. 

Codium coronatum Setchell 1926: 82, pl. 10, figs 2-5; pl. 11, figs 2, 3, pl. 12, figs 1, 5 (type 

locality: Ame Reef, Tahiti); Gilbert 1947: 123; 1961: 442; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509. 

Codium adhaerens (misapplied name; vide Silva et al. 1987); Dickie 1876: 243; Okamura 

1915(1913-1915): 140, pl. 134, figs 1-3; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 63; Gilbert 1946: 78; 

1947: 123; Durairatnam 1961: 22, pl. IV, fig. 1; Gilbert 1961: 442; Chapman 1977: 162; 

Lewis 1987: 17; Lewis and Norris 1987: 8; Tsuda 1991: 42. 

(Figs 41,43,59) 

Thallus applanate and dorsiventral, up to 15 cm broad and 1 cm thick; dark green and 

adhering strongly to the substratum. Orbicular excrescences present, with older plants 

assuming a convoluted habit. Medullary filaments 17-23 Km in diameter; peripheral utricles 

clavate to pyriform, 58-88 km broad and 380-500 p,m long, with rounded apices. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Marshall Islands, Caroline Islands, Tahiti, Papua New Guinea, 

Australia, Lord Howe Island, Hawaii, Taiwan, Philippines, Indonesia, Japan, China, Ceylon, 

Tanzania. 


Chapman 1971: 165 (as C. adhaerens); Kasahara 1985: 14, pl. 1, fig. 3 (as C. coronatum 

var. aggregata Btirgesen); South and Kasahara 1992: 50 (listed as both C. coronatum and 

C. arabicum). 


Lopta (L20/ USP 410), Tua'koi (T7/ USP 409). 


Found on the middle reef, sometimes covering large areas of coral rubble exposed at low 

tide (e.g. at Lopta, where it is the dominant cover in some places).

Codium bulbopilum Setchell 1924: 173, fig. 38 (type locality: Aua, Western Samoa); 

Setchell 1926: 84, pl. 11, fig. 1; pl. 12, fig. 2; Lucas 1935: 204, pl. 5, fig. 3; Valet 1968; 

Jones and Kraft 1984: 26, figs 4, 5B-F; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; Lewis 1987: 18; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 59; Millar and Kraft 19946: 433. 

(Figs 42,45) 

Thallus dark-green, terete and imbricating with axes arching downwards. Branching 

irregularly dichotomous, axes 2-3 mm in diameter and up to 8 cm long. Medullary filaments 

3541 ym in diameter, up to 2 arising per utricle. Peripheral utricles obovoid, cylindrical to 

subspherical 140-235 pm broad and 382-500 ym long with rounded apices and occasional 

hairs up to 29 ym in diameter arising from the apical zone. Thallus anastomosing, attached 

to substratum at intervals. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Samoa, Tahiti, Lord Howe Island, northern Australia. 


Kasahara 1985: 15, pl. 1, fig. 4; pl. 14, fig. A; South 1991: 5; 1993; South and Kasahara 

1992: 50. 


Tua'koi (T8/ USP 407, T9/ USP 408). 


Found in the middle reef, either attached to coral rubble in association with C. arabicum 

(Lopta) or growing at the base of rocks (Tua'koi). This alga is edible, and used in traditional 

Rotuman dishes (either as a salad or boiled in coconut milk). The dried thallus is also used as 

a scouring pad. It is locally known as lum nefinau. 

Codium sp. 

(Figs. 18,44,46,47) 

Growing solitarily in the middle reef, attached to coral rubble was a plant (Figs 18,44,46, 

47) that closely resembles Codium ovale Zanardini, reported from the Marshall Islands by 

Dawson (1956: 39, fig. 25). The central stipe in the Rotuman specimen is much less 

pronounced than in C, ovale. The thallus is ovoid-globular, up to 20 mm in diameter and 

basally attached to substratum by a central peduncle 1.5-2 mm in diameter. Utricles 400-640 

km long and 100-170 ym in diameter. 


Tua'koi (T21NSP 618). 

Halimedaceae 

Halimeda Lamouroux 18 12 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Halimeda 

(Adapted in part from South 1992) 

1. Distinct holdfast present .......................................................... .2 

1: Distinct holdfast absent ........................................................... .3 

2. Holdfast large to massive, calcification moderately heavy; segments reniform, cuneate or 

otherwise ............................................................ H.sL?zulans 

2: Holdfast small, not massive; calcification light to heavy; segments not reniform ........... .4


3. Plants attached by rhizoids when in contact with the substratum; sprawling or in clumps; segments 

ribbed.. ....................................................................... .9 

3: Plants attached by an inconspicuous holdfast, spreading or compact in form, often forming cushionlike 

clumps; segments not ribbed ............................................... H. tuna 

4. Plants fragile, friable; surface of segments dull, rugose, noticeably pitted ....... H. nzacrophysa 

4: Plants not fragile or friable; segments not dull, rugose or noticeably pitted ................ .5 

5. Segments very large, c. 20 X 15 mm; discoid to reniform ........................ H. discoidea 

5: Segments less than 20 X 15 mm, deltoid to reniform, not discoid .......................... .6 

6. Basal segment a flat, fan-shaped fusion structure up to 10 mm broad, lower segments trilobed ... 

................................................................. H. n~icronesica 

6: Basal segment not a fan-shaped fusion structure, lower segments not trilobed ............. .7 

7. Segments 10 (-1 1) mm long X 18 (-20) mm broad; many of the segments supported by a cushion 

segment, or a stalk region of uncorticated medullary filaments ..................... H. cuneata 

7: Segments 5 (-8) mm long X 5 (-15) mm broad, not supported by a cushion segment or a stalk 

region of uncorticated medullary filaments ........................................... .8 

8. Calcification rather heavy, utricles remaining laterally adherent following decalcification; nodal 

medullary filaments not especially entangled and adhering only slightly ......... H. bikinensis 

8: Calcification moderate, utricles usually separating following decalcification; nodal medullary 

filaments entangled and strongly adhering ................................. H. taenicola 

9. Plants forming erect bushy clumps with a single holdfast; segments reniform, not oval, ribbed and 

trilobed at base of plant, 5 X 10 mm; branching dense and irregular to opposite, in many planes; 

calcification light to moderate. Peripheral utricles small and rounded in surface view, 10-12 km in 

diameter ...................................................... H. opuntia var. opuntia 

9: Plants creeping or pendulous in habit, not forming erect bushy clumps; holdfasts multiple; segments 

reniform to oval, slightly ribbed, 5 X 6 mm; branching sparse, in one plane; calcification moderate 

to heavy. Peripheral utricles large and hexagonal in surface view, 26-27 krn in diameter. ......... 

........................................................... H. opurztia var. hederacea 

Halimeda bikinensis W.R. Taylor 1950: 87, pl. 48, fig. 1 (type locality: Bikini Atoll, 

Marshall Islands); Hillis 1959: 358, pl. 2, fig. 1; pl. 5, figs 17, 18; pl. 6, fig. 3; pl. 10; Tsuda 

and Wray 1977: 97; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 141, fig. 43; Silva et al. 1987: 114; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 29. 

(Figs 65,68,77) 

Plants up to 15 cm tall 12 cm broad. Holdfast small, basal segment single and small. 

Segments oval to reniform, slightly bent and heavily calcified, 5-15 mm broad, 5-8 mm 

high. Surface dull and brittle, slightly yellowish at base. Many specimens with moderate 

coralline algal (?Lithophyllum sp.) encrustation on base. Cortical utricles in surface view 

hexagonal, 26-28 km in diameter. Medullary filaments generally fused in 3s at the node. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Papua New Guinea, Philippines. 


Kasahara 1988; South 1992: 5, figs 1, 2; South and Kasahara 1992: 50. 


Hofe'a (HI, H10-12, H24, H301 USP 390, H31, H321 USP 389, H33, H341 USP 388, H38, 

H41, H45/ USP 387, H49, H54, H66, H73, H79, H86, H91, H93, H95, H100, H109); Oinafa 

(05, 033, 070). 


Deep pools on inner reef flat, hanging from coral shelves and ledges (Hofe'a); within 

cavities on inner reef flat and pools, below low tide level (Oinafa). The specimens generally 

agreed with the description given by Taylor (1950).

Halimeda cuneata Hering in Krauss 1846: 214 (type locality Durban, South Africa); 

Okamura 19 l5(1913-19 15): 202, pl. 147; Dawson 1956: 41, fig. 29; Hillis 1959: 345, pls 1, 

5-7, 9; Mefiez 1961: 58, pl. 4, figs 43-46; pl. 5, figs 54, 55; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 97; 

Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 124, figs 36,61; Lewis 1987: 28; Lewis and Nonis 1987: 9; Silva et 

al. 1987: 114; Millar and Kraft 1994b: 435. 

Halimeda obovata Kiitzing 1858: 11, pl. 25, fig. 1. 

Halimeda versatilis J. Agardh 1887: 86. 

(Figs 66, 78) 

Plants to 8 cm tall, arising from single, small holdfast. Calcification light, colour greenish- 

cream. Segments plane and thin, mostly cuneate with some discoid tendency in upper parts; 

up to 14 mm broad and 16 mm high. Many of the segments supported by a cushion segment, 

or a stalk region of uncorticated medullary filaments. Peripheral utricles hexagonal in surface 

view, 35-37 Fm in diameter. Up to 4 of these supported per secondary utricle. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Australia, Philippines, Taiwan, South Africa. 


Kasahara 1985: 18, pl. 2, fig. 2; pl. 14, fig. c (as H. cuneata$ undulata Barton); South 

1991: 5; South 1992: 5, figs 9-1 1; South and Kasahara 1992: 51. 


Hofia (H3/ USP 39 1, H60). 


Pools in inner reef flat, often found within protective red algal mats. 

Halimeda discoidea Decaisne 1842: 102 (type locality: 'Kamschatka', Russiafide Silva 

et al. 1987); Taylor 1950: 85, pl. 45, fig. 1; 1960: 179, pl. 24, fig. 2; Egerod 1952: 398, 

pl. 38, fig. 19b-d; Hillis 1959: 352, pl. 2, fig. 5; p1. 5, fig. 11; pl. 6, fig. 11; pl. 7, figs 9, 10; 

pl. 8, figs 5-8; pl. 11; Levring 1960: 122; Trono 1968: 183, pl. 17, figs 1-3; Womersley and 

Bailey 1970: 281; Dawes 1974: 81; Jaasund 1976: 31, fig. 62; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 97; 

Sartoni 1979: 280, fig. If; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 136, fig. 41; Dong and Tseng 1984: 288, 

pl. 143, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985b: 642, fig 1; fig. 5; fig. 9; figs 35, 36; Trono 1986: 

230, fig. 30; Lewis 1987: 28; Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 114; Garrigue and 

Tsuda 1988: 59; Abbott 1989: 226; Littler et al. 1989: 90; Tsuda 1991: 42; Tsuda and 

Kamura 199 1 : 69, pl. 4, fig. 1; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 175; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 29; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 135, pl. 5, fig. 3; Millar and 

Kraft 19946: 435. 

Halimeda discoidea var. platyloba BGrgesen 191 1: 134, fig. 3. 

Halimeda discoidea$ intermedia Gilbert 1947: 126. 

Halimeda discoidea$ subdigitata Gilbert 1947: 125. 

Halimeda tuna Barton 1901: 11 (p.p.). 

?Halimeda cuneata Hering$ digitata Barton 1901: 16, pl. 2, fig. 9. 

(Figs 67,79) 

Plants to 7 cm tall, single short stalk-like segment at base. Lightly calcified, light green to 

cream in colour. Segments large (up to 20 mm broad and 15 mm high) and in a single plane, 

mostly branching dichotomously. Peripheral utricles hexagonal in surface view, between 36


to 38 km in diameter. Secondary utricles up to 110 ym in diameter, distinctly inflated, 

supporting up to 4 primary utricles. Cortex generally 2-layered. 

Distribution 

Tropical Indian and Pacific Oceans, Caribbean. 


Chapman 1971: 166; Kasahara 1988, South 1992: 6, figs 15-17; South and Kasahara 

1992: 18. 


Hofba (H18); Hapmafau (HAP4); Mea (MI/ USP 392). 


Tidal pools on inner reef, within mats of Melanamansia glomerata (Mea); bottom of tidal 

pools, uncommon (Hofba); shallow tidal pools, single specimen (Hapmafau). 

Halimeda macrophysa Askenasy 1888: 14, pl. IV, figs 1 4 (type locality: Makutu Island, 

Fiji); Barton 1901: 17, pl. 2, figs 15-18; Weber-van Bosse 1913: 121; Dawson 1957: 108, 

fig. 12; Hillis 1959: 361, pl. 2, fig. 3; pl. 5, fig. 16; pl. 6, fig. 8; pl. 11; Womersley and Bailey 

1970: 282; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 98; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 134, figs 40, 99; Trono 1986: 

233, fig. 34; Lewis 1987: 30; Silva et al. 1987: 115; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 60; Ohba and 


(Figs 7 1, 80) 

Plants up to 50 mm tall, 100 mm in diameter, arising from a single small holdfast and 

spreading outward in a cushion-like manner. Segments fragile and renifom, up to 20 mm 

broad and 10 mm high, outer margins often undulated. Colour pale green to white upon 

drying, dull and moderately calcified with characteristic flexibility. Peripheral utricles large, 

rounded and separate following decalcification, about 100 ym in diameter. Secondary 

utricles branching dichotomously. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Marshall Islands, Solomon Islands, Papua New Guinea, northern 

Australia, Philippines. 


Chapman 1971: 166; Kasahara 1985: 21; South 1992: 8, figs 12-14; South and Kasahara 

1992: 18. 


Hof6a (H28, H61-62, H65, H88, H97, H108, H214/ USP 393, H215); Lopta (Ll); Mea 

W4). 


Low-profile, common within rock cavities or depressions on inner reef flat. A peculiar 

commensal crab was found on one specimen (Fig. 208), mimicking the shape of an 

intergeniculum of its host-plant. The genus of this associated invertebrate is currently under 

investigation. 

Halimeda micronesica Y. Yamada 1941: 121, fig. 15; 19446: 29, pl. 5 (type locality: Ant 

atoll, Ponape Island, East Carolines); Taylor 1950: 89, pl. 46, fig. 2; pl. 47; Hillis 1959: 364,

pl. 3, fig. 1; pl. 5, figs 13, 14; pl. 6, fig. 2; pl. 9; Trono 1968: 186, pl. 17, fig. 6; Womersley 

and Bailey 1970: 282; Itono 1973: 160, fig. 21; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 98; Hillis-Colinvaux 

1980: 149; Dong and Tseng 1984: 290, pl. 144, fig. 1; Payri and Meinesz 1985b: 643, figs 

16, 18, 24, 46; Lewis 1987: 30; Silva et al. 1987: 115; Tsuda 1991: 43; Tsuda and Kamura 

1991: 71, pl. 4, figs 2, 3; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 176; Verheij and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 137, pl. 6, fig. 3; Wynne 1993: 22, fig. 10. 

Halimeda orientalis Gilbert 1947: 126, fig. 1. 

(Figs 69, 81, 82) 

Plants up to 9 cm tall 10 cm broad, bushy. Basal segment a distinctive flat, fan-shaped 

fusion structure up to 10 mm broad and 5 mm high, supporting many closely-spaced, mostly 

monoplanar branches. Lower segments trilobed, intermediate segments deltoid and slightly 

ribbed, outer segments oval to deltoid, not ribbed, 2-3 mm broad and 1-2 mm high. Colour 

dull greenish-white, segments small and brittle. Cortical utricles rounded and separate in 

surface view, 20-21 pm in diameter, branching dichotomous. 

Distribution 

Marshall Islands, Caroline Islands, Solomon Islands, Tahiti, northern Australia, Indonesia, 

China, Maldives. 

Fijian Record 



Oinafa (08, 017, 020, 027, 028-29, 031, 039, 0501 USP 394, 055, 058, 0601 USP 

396); Hapmafau (HAP21 USP 395). 


Common in deep pools on inner reef flat, often epiphytic on H. bikinensis and 

H. taenicola. Characteristic rope-like uncorticated medullary filaments extend 5-6 cm-from 

some basal segments over the substratum, bearing a young plant at the end. This is a mode of 

vegetative reproduction in this species, as well as a means of added attachment to the 

substratum (Wynne 1993). 

Halimeda opuntia (Linnaeus) Lamouroux 1812: 186; Barton 1901: 18, pl. 2, figs 19-27; 

Weber-van Bosse 1913: 121; Setchell 1935: 263; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 63; Taylor 

1950: 80, pl. 39, fig. 1; Egerod 1952: 397, pl. 3, fig. 19a, e, f; Dawson 1954: 395, fig. 12; 

1956: 41; 1957: 109; Hillis 1959: 359, pl. 2, figs 7, 8; pl. 5, figs 3,4; pl. 6, fig. 6; pl. 7, fig. 3; 

pl. 10; Levring 1960: 122; Taylor 1960: 176, pl. 23, fig. 3; pl. 24, fig. 1; Chapman 1961: 

127; Durairatnam 1961: 24, pl. 6, figs 1, 2; Tsuda 1964: 7; Trono 1968: 178, pl. 18, figs 1-4; 

Valet 1968: 46; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 282; Dawes 1974: 82; Jaasund 1976: 33, fig. 

65; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 98; Sartoni 1979: 284, fig. 4c; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 110, figs 

19, 51, 92; Dong and Tseng 1984: 290, pl. 144, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; 1985b: 

644, figs 26, 29, 32, 48, 49; Trono 1986: 234, fig. 35; Heijs 1987: 149; Lewis 1987: 30; 

Lewis and Norris 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 115; Gamgue and Tsuda 1988: 60; Tsuda 1991: 

43; Abbott 1989: 226; Littler et al. 1989: 94; Tsuda and Kamura 1991: 65, pl. 2, fig. 4; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 176; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 29; Verheij 

and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 137, pl. 6, figs 5, 6. 

Corallina opuntia Linnaeus 1758: 805 (type locality: Jamaica). 

Halimeda cordata J. Agardh 1887: 83 (see Tsuda and Wray 1977; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980; 

Silva et al. 1987). 

Halimeda opuntia (Linnaeus) Lamouroux f. cordata (J. Agardh) Barton 1901: 20, pl. 2, 

fig. 20; Okarnura 1915 (1913-1915): 207, pl. 148, figs 1-7.


Halimeda triloba Decaisne 1842: 102. 

Halimeda opuntia (Linnaeus) Lamouroux f. triloba (Decaisne) J. Agardh 1887: 84; 

Taylor 1960: 176; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 138, pl. 6, fig. 6. 

?Halimeda opuntia (Linnaeus) Lamouroux var. macrocarpa Askenasy. 

(Fig. 70a-c) 


Askenasy 1888; Chapman 1971: 166; Kasahara 1985: 22, pl. 2, fig. 3; Kasahara 1988; 

South 1991: 5; South 1992: 9, figs 26-28; South and Kasahara 1992: 51. 

Halimeda opuntia (Linnaeus) Lamouroux var. opuntia Hillis 1959: 360, pl. 2, fig. 8; pl. 

5, fig. 3; Chapman 1977: 162; Wynne 1993: 23, fig. 11. 

(Figs 70b, 83) 

Plants bushy and possessing multiple attachment points; branching dense and irregular to 

opposite, in many planes. Clumps to 10 cm in diameter, 6 cm high. Segments 10 mm broad 

to 5 mm high, reniform, ribbed and trilobed at base of plant. Colour light to dark green, basal 

segments often white. Cortical utricles small, rounded and slightly adhering in surface view 

10-12 p,m in diameter. Secondary utricles slender and fork-shaped, arising as dichotomies of 

the medullary filaments. 

Distribution 

Tropical Pacific and Indian Oceans. 


Fapufa (Fl); Hofe'a (H46, H82, H105, H110, 11 1, H200, H202, H206, H219, 220); 

Oinafa (015, 023, 036, 37, 040,41, 043, 045, 047, 049, 0531 USP 397, 056, 059, 071, 

72,075); Tua'koi (Tll USP 399, T2). 


Most common Halimeda sp. on Rotuman reefs, found at all sites and often in exposed 

places (e.g. edge of reef) where its low-profile habit and strong attachment mode offer a 

distinct advantage over other species. In sheltered, sandy sites (e.g. Isilepi at Hapmafau) this 

species forms large clumps up to 1 m in diameter in shallow water, often in association with 

epiphytic Caulerpa racemosa and C, serrulata. 

Halimeda opuntzh (Linnaeus) Lamouroux var. hederacea (Barton) Hillis 1959: 360, pl. 2, 

fig. 7; pl. 5, fig. 4; Taylor 1950: 81, pl. 40, fig. 1; Dawson 1956: 42; 1957: 109; Payri and 

Meinesz 1985a: 509; Lewis 1987: 3 1. 

Halimeda opuntia f. hederacea Barton 1901: 21, pl. 2, fig. 23 (type locality: Indonesia). 

Halimeda opuntia forma Taylor 1950: 83. 

?Halimeda incrassataJ: distorta Yamada 1941: 119, fig. p. 120; Yamada 1944: 28, pl. 4. 

(Figs 70c, 84) 

Plants bushy and loose in habit, with multiple holdfasts, forming distinctive net-like 

complexes. Heavily calcified, light green to white in colour. Does not form clumps, but 

rather assumes a creeping or hanging habit. Segments up to 6 mm broad and 5 mm high, 

trilobed at base of plant, becoming reniform to oval at outer portions, very slightly ribbed. 

Peripheral utricles hexagonal in surface view, 24-27 p.m in diameter.

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Tahiti, northern Australia, Indonesia. 


Hofka (H35/ USP 400, H36, H75, H92, H102, HI031 USP 398, H104, 

Mea (M2); Oinafa (010). 


This variety is less common and is often found creeping on the sides of sandy tidal pools 

or hanging from coral ledges. Habit tending to spread out or hang rather than being upright. 

Halimeda simulans Howe 1907: 503, pl. 29 (type locality: Culebra Island, Puerto Rico); 

Hillis 1959: 368, pl. 3, fig. 4, pl. 5, fig. 27; pl. 6, fig. 15; pl. 11; Taylor 1960: 180, pl. 24, fig. 

4; Chapman 1961: 129, fig. 149; Valet 1968: 48, pl. 11, fig. 3; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 

283; Woelkerling 1976: 96, fig. 51; Chapman 1977: 162; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 98; Hillis- 

Colinvaux 1980: 103, fig. 26; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; 1985b: 644, figs 27,30, 33, 50; 

Trono 1986: 235, fig. 36; Lewis 1987: 31; Silva et al. 1987: 116; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 

60; Tsuda 1991: 43; Tsuda and Kamura 1991: 63, pl. 2, figs 1, 2; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 176 (as 'Halimeda ad simulans Howe'); South and Yen 

1992: 127; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 138, pl. 6, fig. 7. 

Halimeda incrassata (Ellis et Solander) Lamouroux var, simulans (Howe) BBrgesen 

1913: 114, fig. 92. 

(Figs 76, 85) 

Plants up to 9 cm tall, relatively heavily calcified. Colour dull greenish-cream. Branching 

di- to tetrachotomous; basal region well-developed, up to 15 mm high. Segments up to 8 mm 

broad and 6 mm high, frequently ribbed, trilobed at base and becoming subcuneate to 

reniform at outer portions. Peripheral utricles hexagonal in surface view, 26-27 p,m in 

diameter. Secondary utricles up to 27 pm broad, supporting up to 3 primary utricles. 

Distribution 

Tropical Pacific Ocean. 


Kasahara 1985: 22, pl. 3, fig. 1; pl. 14, fig. D; Kasahara 1988; South 1992: 10, figs 29-31; 

South and Kasahara 1992: 5 1. 


Hofka (H6/ USP 401, H213); Hapmafau (HAPI, HAP7); Oinafa (01, 030, 034, 057, 

064-65). 


Found in sandy patches on inner reef flat and bottom of tidal pools. 

Halimeda taenicola W.R. Taylor 1950: 86, pl. 46, fig. 1 (type locality: Rongerick, 

Enyvetik Island, Marshall Islands); Dawson 1956: 42; 1957: 109; Hillis 1959: 354, pl. 2, fig. 

6; pl. 5, fig. 12; pl. 6, fig. 14; pl. 14; pl. 11; Trono 1968: 182, pl. 16, fig. 3; Womersley and 

Bailey 1970: 284; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 99; Hillis-Colinvaux 1980: 139, fig. 42; Dong and 

Tseng 1984: 290, pl. 144, fig. 3; Payri and Meinesz 1985~: 509; 1985b: 645, figs 28, 31, 34, 

51; Trono 1986: 236, fig. 37; Lewis 1987: 32; Silva et al. 1987: 116; Garrigue and Tsuda 

1988: 60; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 176; Verheij and Prud'homme van 

Reine 1993: 139, pl. 6, fig. 8; Wynne 1993: 23, fig. 12.


(Figs 72,74, 86) 

Plants up to 8 cm tall, with small holdfast and monoplanar branching. Lower segments 

joined, upper segments up to 8 mm broad and 10 mm high, deltoid to reniform, thick. Colour 

light green to yellowish cream. Peripheral utricles hexagonal in surface view, 28-32 pm in 

diameter. Secondary utricles up to 120 km long, somewhat inflated and slender. 

Distribution 



Garbary et al. 1991: 252; South 1992: 10, figs 32, 33; South and Kasahara 1992: 51. 


Hapmafau (HAP6); Oinafa (03, 071 USP 403, 09,011/ USP 402). 


Found at the bottom of tidal pools and surge inlets, often in association with epiphytic 

H. micronesica. Also found in sandy patches with moderately strong current. 

Halimeda tuna (Ellis et Solander) Lamouroux 1812: 186; 1816: 309, pl. XI, fig. 8; 

Dickie 1876: 244; Barton 1901: 11, pl. 1, figs 1-6; Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 120; Okamura 

1932(1929-1932): 70, pl. 285, figs 1-4 (f. typica Barton); Gilbert 1946: 78; 1947: 124; 

Taylor 1950: 84, pl. 43, fig. 2; 1960: 178, pl. 24, fig. 5; 1966: 364; Hillis 1959: 342, 

pl. 1, 5, 6, 9; Chapman 1961: 130, fig. 150; Durairatnam 1961: 25; Trono 1968: 182, pl. 16, 

fig. 2; Valet 1968: 47; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 284; Jaasund 1976: 31, fig. 61; 

Chapman 1977: 161 162; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 99; Sartoni 1979: 286, fig. 5c; Hillis- 

Colinvaux 1980: 122, fig. 35; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 509; Trono 1986: 236, fig. 38; 

Lewis 1987: 32; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 5; Silva et al. 1987: 116; Garrigue and Tsuda 

1988: 60; Abbott 1989: 226; Littler et al. 1989: 88; Tsuda 1991: 43; Tsuda and Kamura 

1991: 69, pl. 3, fig. 5; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 176; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 29; South and Yen 1992: 127; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 

139, pl. 6, fig. 9; Wynne 1993: 23, fig. 13. 

Corallina tuna Ellis et Solander 1786: 11 1, pl. 20, fig. e (type locality: Mediterranean Sea). 

?Halimeda tuna f. albertisii Piccone 1879: 23, fig. 2. 

Halimeda tuna f. platydisca (Decaisne) Barton 1901: 14, pl. 1, fig. 2. 

Halimeda tuna var. platydisca BGrgesen 191 1: 134. 

(Figs 73, 75, 87, 88) 

Plants up to 13 cm tall, often with holdfast up to 40 mm long. Lightly calcified, basal 

segments rather more whitish than rest of plant, usually light to dark green and shiny. Basal 

segments reniform to deltoid, up to 20 mm broad and 10 mm high. Outer segments smaller, 

deltoid to subcuneate, up to 5 mm broad and 7 mm high. Cortical utricles hexagonal in 

surface view, about 40 pm in diameter. Secondary utricles somewhat inflated, di- to 

trichotomously branched. 

Distribution 

Tropical Indian and Pacific Oceans. 


Chapman 1971: 166 1977; Kasahara 1985: 23, pl. 2, fig. 1; Kasahara 1988; South 1992: 

10, figs 35-38; South and Kasahara 1992: 51.


Hof6a (H2, H4,5, H7-9, H13-17, H19-23, H25-27, H37, H391 USP 406, H42, H44, H48, 

H50-53, H55-59, H63,64, H67-72, H76-78, H80, 81, H83-87, H89, H94, H96, H98, H109, 

H203-205, H207/ USP 404, H2081 USP 405, H209, H210, H212, H216-218); Hapmafau 

(HAP3, HAPS); Mea (M3); Oinafa (02, 04, 06, 012-14, 016, 018, 19, 021, 22, 024-26, 

032,035,038,042,044, 046, 048, 051, 52, 054, 061-63,066,068,69,073,078). 


Very common plant of the northern Rotuman reefs, from Mea to Oinafa. Found at bottom 

of tidal pools and rock crevices, often within the protection of Melanamansia glomerata mats. 

Udoteaceae 

Avrainvillea Decaisne 1842 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Avrainvillea 

1. Blade oblong to subcuneate; habit gregarious ............................... .A. amadelpha 

1: Blade peltate; habit solitary ............................................... A. roturnensis 

Avrainvillea amadelpha (Montagne) Gepp et Gepp 191 1: 139, p1.14, figs 1 14, 1 15; Tsuda 

and Wray 1977: 93; Olsen-Stojkovich 1985: 36, fig. 19; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 56; 

Brostoff 1989: 166, figs 1, 2; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1989: 121, pl. 1, figs 

1-17; 1992a: 177; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 129, pl. 4, fig. 3. 

Udotea amadelpha Montagne 1857: 136 (type locality unknown). 

Chloroplegma sordidum Zanardini 1858: 290, tab XI11 fig. 1 (type locality: Red Sea). 

Avrainvillea lacerata var. robustior Gepp et Gepp 191 1: 139, pl. 13, figs 108, 109 (type 

locality: Bapon, Singapore); Weber-van Bosse 1913: 115; Taylor 1950: 70; Dawson 1957: 

108, fig. 1 lb; Valet 1968: 50, pl. 10, fig. 6; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 280. 

(Fig. 50a, b) 

Plants dark-green and velutinous, gregarious in habit, up to 2 cm high and 1.7 cm broad, 

with broadly flattened and spongy oblong to subcuneate flabellar blade borne on a stalk up to 

4 mm long and 2 mm wide. Blade upright, stipe flattened in cross section; the holdfast 

developed into an extensive emergent mat from which many stipes arise. Cortical filaments 

16-34 km in diameter, dichotomously branched with equal constrictions just above 

dichotomies. Siphons hyaline and cylindrical in cortex, torulose and felted in pseudocortex. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Eastern Micronesia, northern Polynesia, Solomon Islands, Indonesia, 

East Africa. 


Kasahara 1988; South and Kasahara 1992: 51. 


Fapufa (F21 USP 333). 


Single clump of plants found growing on the rim of an elevated rocky tide pool at 

Fapufa's Afoa Point, sheltered from wave action and in association with Caulerpa racemosa. 

The base of the Avrainvillea was host to a cover of Lobophora variegata.


Avrainvillea rotumensis N'Yeurt, Littler et Littler 1996 (type locality: Hofka, Rotuma 

Island). 

(Figs 51a-d, 53,56) 

Thalli to 10 cm tall, olive-green, solitary; mature blades peltate, 9 cm in diameter, 4 mm 

thick, smooth, concentric zonation faint, blade margins smoothly rounded, not lobed or 

ragged, to 2 mm thick; stipe to 6 cm long, 2 cm in diameter, cylindrical, seldom branched; 

anchored by bulbous, fibrous rhizoidal system. Medullary siphons of blade 20-40 pm in 

diameter, moniliform, weak-walled; surface siphons of blade taper abruptly to 8 pm in 

diameter, moniliform to tortuous, dichotomies wide-spreading; apices rounded, hooked or 

tortuous, forming loose cortex; siphons of growing margin 30-40 pm in diameter, 

moniliform, tapering to 20 ym in diameter; medullary siphons of stipe 50-80 pm in 

diameter, moniliform; cortical siphons of stipe tapering to 8-15 ym in diameter, moniliform 

to tortuous, often hyaline; rhizoids moniliform, tortuous to cylindrical, 20-50 pm in 

diameter tapering to 10 pm in diameter. 


Hof6a (H2301 !USP 615; H2311 USP 622). 

(! = type specimen) 


Growing 1.5-3 m depth, at the mouth of a passage on outer reef; anchored in carbonate 

sediments. Specimens of this alga were confirmed as representing a new species by D.S., and 

M.M. Littler of the Smithsonian Institution, and it is described by N'Yeurt et al. (1996). It is 

characterised by being the only truly peltate form of the genus, and hence easily recognisable 

in the field). 

Chlorodesmis Harvey et Bailey 1851: 373 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Chlorodesmis 

1. Plants up to 6 cm high; filaments 95-130 pm in diameter ..................... .C. hildebrandtii 

1: Plants up to 15 cm high, filaments 140-182 pm in diameter ........................ .C. nzajor 

Chlorodesmis hildebrandtii A. Gepp et E.S. Gepp 191 1: 16, pl. 8, figs 74, 75 (lectotype 

locality: Johana (Anjouan) Island, Comoro Island,fide Ducker 1967: 165); Weber-van Bosse 

1913a: 114; Gilbert 1947: 122; 1961: 442; Egerod 1952: 377, pl. 34a, figs 9a, b, d; Dawson 

1954: 394, fig. 1lJ g; Tsuda 1964: 5; Taylor 1966: 352; Ducker 1967: 164, pl. 6, fig. 16; 

Trono 1968: 173, pl. 13, figs 1-3; Jaasund 1976: 27, fig. 55; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 95; 

Magruder and Hunt 1979: 21; Dong and Tseng 1984: 286, pl. 142, fig. 3; Ngan and Price 

1979: 6; Trono 1986: 224, fig. 24; Lewis 1987: 27; Silva et al. 1987: 118; Abbott 1989: 226; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1989: 129, pl. 3, figs 5-1 1; 1992a: 177; Verheij and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 133, text fig. 4b; Wynne 1993: 22. 

(Figs 54, 63) 

Thallus light green and fluffy in water, up to 6 cm tall and composed of many free, hair- 

like cylindrical filaments 95-130 ym in diameter, with repeated symmetrical dichotomous 

(and sometimes trichotomous) branching. Supporting filaments truncated at point of branch 

constrictions; the constrictions equal just above dichotomies. Basal translucent rhizoids 

irregularly branched, 86-1 15 p,m in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Hawaii, northern Australia, Indonesia, Philippines, Vietnam, China, 

Maldives.


Garbary et al. 1991: 252; South and Kasahara 1992: 52; Raj 1993: 54, figs 25-26. 


Lopta (L151 USP 339, *L24). 


Common at all sites, either attached to staghom coral rubble in middle reef, or to rocks in 

the backreef. This species is intermediate between Chlorodesmis fastigiata and C, major (see 

Ngan and Price 1979). 

Chlorodesmis major Zanardini 1874: 504 (type locality: Lord Howe Island); J. Agardh 

1887a: 5 1; A. Gepp and E.S. Gepp 191 1: 16; Okamura 1932(1929-1932): 61; Lucas 1935: 

200; Egerod 1952: 377, fig. 9c; Ducker 1967: 167, pls 7-8, 17-18; Lewis 1987: 27; Silva et 

al. 1987: 118; Millar and Kraft 1994b: 435. 

Chlorodesmis torresiensis W.R. Taylor 1945: 66 (type locality: Murray Island, Torres 

Strait, Australia); Taylor 1966: 352. 

(Figs 55,57) 

Thallus dark-green, coarse and up to 15 cm high and 10 cm broad, with small stipe. 

Filaments 140-182 ym in diameter, truncated at dichotomies with equal constrictions. 

Rhizoidal basal system 100-130 1J.m in diameter, with numerous constrictions. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Lord Howe Island, Hawaii, northern Australia, Indonesia, Philippines. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau (HAP211 USP 340). 


Found on the back reef, typically within the protection of coral rubble or attached to 

exposed beach rocks (e.g. at Hapmafau). This species is very similar to Chlorodesmis 

hildebrandtii, except for the larger diameter of the filaments (>I40 ym; vide Ducker 1967). 

Rhipidosiphon Montagne 1842 

Rhipidosiphon javensis Montagne 1842a: 14, 15 (type locality: Java, Indonesia); Littler 

and Littler 1990: 35; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 140, pl. 7, fig. 6; Wynne 

1993: 23, fig. 14. 

Udotea javensis (Montagne) A. Gepp and E.S. Gepp 1904: 363; Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 

116; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 62; Gilbert 1947: 122; Taylor 1950: 73; Egerod 1952: 379, 

fig. 10; Dawson 1954: 395, fig. 136, c; 1956: 40; 1957: 108; 1961: 445; Trono 1968: 187; 

Valet 1968: 51; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 280; Jaasund 1976: 29, fig. 60; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 100; Sartoni 1979: 292, fig. 8c; Dong and Tseng 1984: 294, pl. 146, fig. 2; Payri 

and Meinesz 1985a: 510; Lewis 1987: 34; Silva et al. 1987: 119; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 

61; Abbott 1989: 226; Tsuda 1991: 43; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1989: 139, pl. 

10, figs 3-9; 1992a: 178.


(Fig. 61) 

Thallus yellow-green, up to 7 mm high and 5 mm broad, fan-shaped blade rounded at 

outer margins and cuneate at base. Thallus consisting of a single layer of parallel filaments 

35-40 pm broad (outer margins) to 80-105 pm broad (base of thallus) with characteristic 

unequal constrictions above each dichotomy. Stipe up to 200 pm in diameter, filamentous 

and uncorticated, mostly uncalcified and monosiphonous. Stipe anchored by fine, translucent 

hyaline rhizoids. 

Distribution 

Tropical Pacific and Indian Oceans, Caribbean. 


Kasahara 1985: 24; 1988 (as Udotea javensis); South 1991: 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 52. 


Tua'koi (*TI21 USP S5: 16). 


Middle reef, epiphytic on Dictyota friabilis. This genus has been re-established by Littler 

and Littler (1990), for the widespread Udotea javensis (Montagne) A. Gepp and E.S. Gepp. 

They note that the anastomosing siphons reported by Montagne (1842~) as characteristic of 

Rhipidosiphon javensis is incorrect, and that the latter genus differs from Udotea by its 

monosiphonous and partly uncalcified stipe. They consider that Gepp and Gepp's (1904) 

placement of Rhipidosiphon javensis within the genus Udotea is based on insufficient 

derived characters. 

Rhipilia Kiitzing 1858 

Rhipilia orientalis A. et E.S. Gepp 1911: 57, pl. 16, figs 134-136; Weber-van Bosse 

1913a: 115; Taylor 1950: 72, pl. 36, fig. 1; Dawson 1956: 40; 1957: 108; Moul 1957: 44; 

Trono 1968: 177, pl. 19, fig. 1; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 279; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 99; 

Lewis 1987: 33; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1989: 131, pl. 6, figs 1-18; Verheij 

and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 140, pl. 7, fig. 2. 

(Figs 52a, b, 62, 64a-c) 

Thallus up to 35 mm high, composed of a stipitate blade up to 30 mm broad tapering into 

a stalk up to 15 mm long and 2 mm in diameter. Blade siphons 20-35 pm in diameter, with 

alternate appendages up to 147 pm long terminating in 2-4 irregular prongs. 

Distribution 

Indonesia, Micronesia, Solomon Islands, north Australia. 


Ropure (R5/ USP 619); Hof6a (USP 777). 


Growing in sandy tidal pools on outer reef, at 1-2 m.

Dasycladales 

Dasycladaceae 

Neomeris Lamouroux 18 16 

Neomeris vanbosseae Howe 1909: 80, pl. 1, figs 4, 7; pl. 5, figs 17-19 ('van bosseae') 

(type locality: Sikka, Flores, Indonesia); Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 88; Gilbert 1943: 17; 

Egerod 1952: 405, pl. 41, fig. 22b; Chapman 1955: 355; Gilbert 1961: 434; Taylor 1966: 

347; Trono 1968: 191; Valet 1968: 52; 1969: 596, pl. 146, figs 2, 5; pl. 153, figs 4-7 10-12 

14; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 287; Jaasund 1976: 9, fig. 20; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 99; 

Dong and Tseng 1984: 268, pl. 133, fig 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 510; Trono 1986: 55, 

fig. 56; Heijs 1987: 152; Lewis 1987: 36; Silva et al. 1987: 121; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 

60; Tsuda 1991: 43; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 178; Verheij and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 147. 

Neomeris dumetosa Sonder 1871 (fide Valet 1969: 596). 

(Figs 58,90) 

Plants cylindrical, up to 20 mm tall and 4 mm in diameter, in a broad, 120-130" curve. 

Basal portion whitish and moderately calcified, upper portion light to dark green with 

hairlike whorls of radial branchlets at the tip. Inner structure with persistent stalk cells 

525-575 p,m long, bearing paired deciduous cortical assimilatory cells, elongated below 

about 200 km, truncate-capitate above; broadly conical to 125 p,m in diameter and giving 

rise terminally to deciduous, segmented monomorphous hairs 0.5-1.0 mm long. Gametangia 

75-100 krn in diameter, bearing a single spherical cyst at the end of a stalk cell between 

paired diamond-shaped assimilatory cells. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 165; Kasahara 1985: 40, pl. 6, fig. 7; South 1991: 6; South and Kasahara 

1992: 53. 


Lopta (L16/ USP 341); Tua'koi (T51 USP 342). 


Grows either singly or gregariously below ledges or within rock crevices and at bases of 

large boulders in middle and back reef locations. 

Polyphysaceae 

Polyphysa Lamarck 18 16: 15 1 

Polyphysa pantula (Solms-Laubach) Schnetter et Bula-Meyer 1982: 42, pl. 7, figs c-f 

(type locality: Celebes, Indonesia); Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 178; 

Millar and Kraft 1994b: 439. 

Acetabularia parvula Solms-Laubach 1895: 29, pl. 2, figs 3, 5 (syntype localities: 

'Tropical India'; Macassar; Celebes; Indonesia); Taylor 1950: 50; Chapman 1955: 355; 

Valet 1969: 621, pl. 11, figs 1-7; pl. 12, fig. 7; pl. 19, figs 24; pl. 20, figs 5-8; pl. 22, figs 1, 

4, 7; pl. 29; pl. 38, figs I, 4, 5; pl. 45, figs 5-7; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 287; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 93; Dong and Tseng 1984: 268, pl. 133, fig. 4; Lewis 1987: 37; Silva et al. 

1987: 122; Tsuda 1991: 40.


Acetabularia moebii Solms-Laubach 1895: 30, pl. 4 fig. 1 (type locality: Mauritius); 

Borgesen 1951: 6, figs 1, 2; Egerod 1952: 411, fig. 23i; Dawson 1954: 397, fig. 13j; 1956: 

43; 1957: 110; Tsuda 1964: 4 ('mobii'); Trono 1968: 192; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 93; Payri 

and Meinesz 1985a: 506; Trono 1986: 243, fig. 48 ('mobii'); Lewis 1987: 37; Abbott 1989: 

226 ('mobii'). 

Acetabularia minutissima Okamura 19 l2(1909-1912): 184 pl. 100, figs 7-1 1 (sensu 

Valet 1969: 622). 

Acetabularia polyphysoides Okamura (non Crouan) 1913: 21 (sensu Valet 1969: 622). 

Acetabularia wettsteinii Schussnig 1930: 338; J., and G. Feldmann 1947: 81, figs 1, 2 

(sensu Valet 1969: 622). 

(Fig. 89) 

Plants up to 6 mm high, with a monoplanar reproductive disc 2.5-3 mm in diameter, 

borne atop a slender stalk. Disc composed of 14 cylindrically clavate segments with rounded 

apices, the segments loosely joined together by light calcification. Corona superior present, 

corona inferior lacking. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Tuvalu, Solomon Islands, Tahiti, northern Australia, Philippines, Japan, 

China. 


Garbary et al. 1991: 252 (as Acetabularia moebii Solms-Laubach). 


Hapmafau ("HAP521 USP S6: 13). 


Found attached to coral debris in the lagoon, in association with Meristotheca 

procumbens P. Gabrielson et Kraft. This species was transferred to the genus Polyphysa by 

Schnetter and Bula-Meyer (1982: 42). The main distinguishing features between 

Acetabularia (Lamouroux 18 12: 185) and Polyphysa are the lateral unison of gametangial 

rays and the presence of an inferior corona in Acetabularia, and mostly free or loosely united 

gametangial rays and the absence of an inferior corona in Polyphysa (Womersley 1984: 295). 

The Rotuman plants agree with the latter description. 

Phaeophyceae 

Ectocarpales 

Ectocarpaceae 

Hincksia J.E. Gray 1864 

Hincksia breviarticulata (J. Agardh) P.C. Silva in Silva et al. 1987: 73; Abbott 1989: 

226; Wynne 1993: 19. 

Ectocarpus breviarticulatus J. Agardh 1847: 7 (type locality: 'St. Augustin' (Oaxaca, 

Mexico)); Dickie 1874; Borgesen 1914: 173, fig. 136; Setchell 1924: 171, fig. 37; Yamada 

and Tanaka 1938: 66; Dawson 1954: 398, fig. 14a, b; 1956: 43; 1957: 110; Taylor 1960: 

201; Durairatnam 1961: 32, pl. 6, figs 10, 11; Chapman 1963: 9, fig. 3; Kuckuck 1963: 362, 

figs 1-3; Trono 1969: 25; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 288; Tsuda 1972: 90, pl. 1, fig. 1; pl. 

2, fig. 1; 1976: 328; Chapman 1977: 162; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 101; Reyes 1980: 119, pl. 

1, fig. 2a, b; Lu and Tseng 1984: 168, pl. 85, fig. 1; Lewis 1985: 3; Payri and Meinesz

1985a: 505; Lewis and Norris 1987: 11; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 6; Tsuda 1991: 44; 

South and Yen 1992: 128. 

Giffordia breviarticulata (J. Agardh) Doty et Albert (nomen nudum) ex Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 45. 

(Figs 95, 98a-e) 

Plants yellow-brown, tufted, 20-35 mm high, with irregular primary branching and 

numerous hooked secondary branchlets which hold the filaments in rope-like spongy strands. 

Filaments about 25 ym thick, composed of rectangular cells about up to 25 X 50 ym. 

Secondary hook-like branchlets up to 800 ym long and 25 ym broad, arising at 85-90' to 

main filaments and spaced at 500-700 ym intervals. Plurilocular sporangia 40-45 ym high, 

short and pyriform, containing about 8 spores and borne on a stalk cell. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Caroline Islands, Micronesia, Hawaii, Nauru, Tahiti, Easter Island, Philippines, 

Taiwan, Ryukyu Islands, Vietnam, China, Ceylon, Maldives, tropical Americas, Europe. 

Fijian Record 



Lopta (L191 USP 357, *L26, *L27, *L28/ USP S6: 7). 


Grows as small tangled tufts on the outer reef crest, often attached to seaward-facing 

rocks exposed to heavy wave action (e.g. at Lopta). 

Sphacelariales 

Sphacelariaceae 

Sphacelaria Lyngbye 1819 

Sphaceluriu rigidulu Kutzing 1843: 292 (type locality: Red Sea); Lewis 1984: 8; Silva et 

al. 1987: 74; Womersley 1987: 166, figs 51d, 54a-g; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 63; Abbott 

1989: 226; Tsuda 1991: 46; Millar and Kraft 1994a: 14. 

Sphacelaria furcigera Kutzing 1855: 27, pl. 90, fig. 11 (Type locality: Karak (Khark) 

Island, Iran) (vide Prud'homme van Reine 1982: 203, figs 508-554; Silva et al. 1987: 74); 

Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 135; Borgesen 1914: 40; 1926: 72; 1941: 46, fig. 21; Dawson 

1954: 400, fig. 14h; 1956: 44; 1957: 110; Taylor 1960: 210, pl. 29, fig. 5; Durairatnam 1961: 

31, pl. 6, figs 4-7; Meiiez 1961: 59, pl. 9, figs 103, 104; pl. 10, figs 105-108; pl. 12, figs 

126-127; Chapman 1963: 15, fig. 9; Earle 1969: 144, fig. 31; Trono 1969: 28, pl. 1, fig. 6; 

Womersley and Bailey 1970: 290; Tsuda 1972: 93,'pl. 1, fig. 4; Dawes 1974: 99; Jaasund 

1976: 37, fig. 75; Woelkerling 1976: 110, fig. 113; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 102; Lu and 

Tseng 1984: 202, pl. 102, fig. 2; Lewis 1985: 8; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 506; Lewis and 

Norris 1987: 11 (var. tenuis Yamada). 

(Fig. 99a, b) 

Thallus light-brown, 7-10 mm high, epiphytic, forming erect penicillate tuft; basal 

holdfast discoid. Branching sparse to frequent, at irregular narrow angles. Main axis linear 

and 2 cells thick, 30-35 ym in diameter with rectangular cells about 15 X 35 ym. Propagula


abundant, with paired slender and slightly tapering arms 100-250 pm long and 15-20 pm 

broad with an approximate angle of 120" between them, borne on a pedicel 230-260 km 

long and with a convex lenticular apical cell rising to 7.5-18 pm. Lateral unilocular 

sporangia subspherical and shortly pedicellate, 37-40 km in diameter. 

Distribution 



Garbary et al. 1991: 253 (as S. furcigera Kutzing); South and Kasahara 1992: 53 (as 

S. furcigera Kiitzing). 


Maka Bay (*MAK11/ USP S6: 5). 


Epiphytic on the base of Sargassum polycystum, in sheltered back reef locations at Maka 

Bay. 

Dictyotales 

Dictyotaceae 

Dictyopteris Lamouroux 1809 

Dictyopteris repens (Okamura) Bgrgesen 1924: 265, fig. 13; Okamura 1931(1929-1932): 

47, pl. 275, figs 17-27; 1931: 103; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 67; Dawson 1956: 44, fig. 34; 

1957: 110, fig. 10; Trono 1969: 31; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 291; Tsuda 1972: 94, pl. 3, 

fig. 1; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 101; Allender and Kraft 1983: 107, fig. 19A, B; Lu and Tseng 

1984: 190, pl. 96, fig. 4; Lewis 1985: 10; Lewis and Norris 1987: 11; Santelices and Abbott 

1987: 6; Silva et al. 1987: 75; Abbott 1989: 227; Tsuda 1991: 44; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 

29; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 150, pl. 9, fig. 1; Millar and Kraft 1994a: 16. 

Haliseris repens Okamura 1916: 8, fig. 3; pl. 1, figs 7-18 (type locality: Truk Island, 

Caroline Island). 

Neurocarpus repens Okamura 19 16: 8. 

(Figs 9 1, 92) 

Fronds recumbent, up to 3 cm long, branching dichotomous with branches 1-3 mm broad; 

thallus distromatic, 65 pm thick, with a prominent midrib 4-8-cells thick. 

Distribution 



Garbary et al. 1991: 253; South and Kasahara 1992: 53. 


Lopta (*L46/ USP S5: 18); Tua'koi (*TI01 USP S5: 10). 


Found associated with Dictyota friabilis at base of staghorn coral rubble.

Dictyota Lamouroux 1809 

Dictyota friabilis Setchell 1926: 91, pl. 13, figs 4-7, pl. 20, fig. 1 (type locality: Tafaa 

Point, Tahiti); Dawson 1954: 401, fig. 16a, b; Tsuda 1964: 7; Tsuda and Trono 1968: 195; 

Trono 1969: 29; Jaasund 1970c: 75, figs 20, 30; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 290; Tsuda 

1972: 96, pl. 4, fig. 3; Jaasund 1976: 39, fig. 79; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 101; Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 43; Lu and Tseng 1984: 194, pl. 98, fig. 1; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 505; Silva 

et al. 1987: 76; Abbott 1989: 227; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 29. 

(Figs 93,94, 100, 101) 

Thallus imbricating, prostrate and friable, flat and membranous; individual fronds 

spreading to 3 cm in diameter. Colour yellowish brown, with irregular dichotomous 

branching and entire margins, contiguous segments mutually attached by bundles of rhizoids. 

Apices rounded, with prominent paired apical cells. Angle of branching about 45-100"; 

segments up to 5 mm broad, tapering at base. Thallus tristromatic, about 125 pm thick with 

epidermal cells 25 p,m tall and medullary cells 75 pm tall with lenticular thickenings. 

Sporangia 55-60 pm in diameter, scattered along middle portion of both surfaces of thallus. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Marshall Islands, Kiribati, Solomon Islands, Tahiti, Papua New Guinea, Hawaii, 

Baker and Howland Islands, Philippines, Vietnam, China, Tanzania. 


Ajisaka and Enomoto 1985: 37, figs 1, 5; South and Kasahara 1992: 54. 


Fapufa (*F5/ USP S5: 9), Hapmafau (HAP251 USP 354, *HAP601 USP S7: 5); Tua'koi 

(*TI 11 USP S5: 8). 


Attached to coral rubble; growing at the base of Avrainvillea amadelpha and other larger 

algae. 

Dilophus J. Agardh 1882: 106 

Dilophus radicans Okamura 1916: 7, pl. 1, figs 1-6, text figs 1,2 (type locality: Ponape, 

Caroline Island); Tsuda and Wray 1977: 101; Lewis and Norris 1987: 12. 

(Figs 102-104) 

Plants orange-brown, up to 6 cm in length, forming a loosely entangled mass creeping on 

or entangled in other algae. Fronds narrow, irregularly and distichously alternately branched, 

ancipito-compressed, up to 900 pm broad and 320-350 p,m thick. Tufts of anchoring fibres 

are emitted from points of attachment on the main axes. Apex of ultimate branches rounded, 

apical cell prominent, up to 60 pm broad and 35 Fm high. In cross-section, thallus composed 

of 2 distinct layers; a medulla 4 or 5 isodiametric cells thick and 47-70 pm in diameter, and 

a single cortical layer of rectangular cells up to 30 pm long and 18 km broad. Reproductive 

sporangia up to 352 X 176 pm, composed of numerous small spores about 12 Fm in 

diameter. Nearly all ultimate branches on the specimen examined bore sporangia about 

700 pm from the apex and centrally positioned on the ventral side of the branches. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Caroline Islands (Micronesia); Taiwan.





Maka Bay ("MAK151 USP S5: 7,863,864), Fapufa (USP S12: 8). 


Growing entangled with Sargassum polycysturn in Maka Bay, seaward of the seagrass 

beds at about 0.6 m depth. Smaller plants found attached to coral, 0.5 m depth in a tidal pool 

at Fapufa, together with Padina tenuis. 

The Rotuman plants are in excellent accord with Okamura's description and habit of the 

Ponape species. North Atlantic species of the genus Dilophus have been transferred to 

Dictyota by Hornig et al. (1992), based on a lack of separating characters between members 

of the two genera. However, work on Pacific species of Dictyota and Dilophus is still in 

progress (Prud'homme van Reine, pers. comm.). While it is likely that Pacific members of 

the genus Dilophus should eventually be incorporated into Dictyota, until such time as the 

conspecificity of the two genera in the Pacific is confirmed the name Dilophus radicans is 

retained in the present treatment. Dilophus is also retained by Millar and Kraft (1994: 17) for 

Australian species of that genus. 

Lobophora J . Agardh 1894 

Lobophora variegata (Lamouroux) Womersley 1967: 22; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 

292; Tsuda 1972: 97, pl. 5, fig. 1; Dawes 1974: 102; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 101; Magruder 

and Hunt 1979: 47; Ngan and Price 1979: 8; Allender and Kraft 1983: 81, fig. 4G, H; 5A, B; 

Lu and Tseng 1984: 196, pl. 99, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 505; Lewis 1985: 14; 

Lewis and Norris 1987: 12; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 6; Silva et al. 1987: 77; Garrigue 

and Tsuda 1988: 62; Abbott 1989: 227; Littler et al. 1989: 116 (as crust form); Tsuda 1991: 

45; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 179; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 29; 

Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 154, pl. 10, fig. 1; Millar and Kraft 1994a: 18. 

Dictyota variegata Lamouroux 1809~: 40 (type locality: Antilles). 

Zonaria variegata (Lamouroux) C. Agardh 1817: xx; Dickie 1876: 245; Weber-van Bosse 

1913a: 175. 

Pocockiella variegata (Lamouroux) Papenfuss 1943: 467; Taylor 1950: 97; 1960: 23 1, pl. 

33, fig. 4; 1966: 357; Dawson 1954: 400, fig. 14k; Chapman 1955: 355; Dawson 1956: 44 ; 

1957: 110; Durairatnam 1961: 34, pl. 7, fig. 9; Chapman 1963: 36, fig. 34a-b; Earle 1969: 

173, figs 53, 70; Trono 1969: 32, pl. 2, figs 3-5; Jaasund 1976: 43, fig. 88; Woelkerling 

1976: 108, figs 99, 100; Womersley 1987: 253. 

Gymnosorus variegatus (Lamouroux) J. Agardh 1894: 11, fig. 91F, G; 92A. 

Lobophora nigrescens Sonder 1845: 50. 

Pocockiella nigrescens (Sonder) Papenfuss 1943: 467. 

(Figs 105, 106) 

Fronds phylloid, prostrate to decumbent, broadly flabellate, simply to irregularly lacerate, 

up to 25 mm long and 15 mm broad, attached by matted rhizoidal holdfasts. Thallus 

encrusting, yellow-brown in colour, up to 100 km thick, composed of 5 cell layers; the cells 

of the central layer (40 pm thick) taller than those of the surrounding cells (15 pm thick). 

Blade deltoid to ovoid, with a marginal row of cuboidal apical cells about 38 pm thick, 

giving rise to vertical rows of cells about 19 km thick. Triangular to ovate sori of sporangia 

scattered on both surfaces of blade. 

Distribution 

Tropical Indian and Pacific Oceans, Caribbean.


Chapman 1971: 167; South and Kasahara 1992: 54. 


Fapufa (*F2/ USP S5: 5); Hapmafau (*HAP331 USP S5: 3); Lopta (*L23/ USP S5: 4), 

Tua'koi (TI31 USP 446). 


Epiphytic on the base of larger algae (e.g. Avrainvillea amadelpha) or attached to rocks 

and coral rubble in relatively sheltered middle and back reef areas, widely distributed around 

the island. 

Padina Adanson 1763 

Padina tenuis Bory de Saint-Vincent 1827: 590 (type locality: fle de France, Mauritius); 

Womersley and Bailey 1970: 292; Tsuda 1972: 98, pl. 5, fig. 4; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 102; 

Allender and Kraft 1983: 83, figs 5D, E, 6A; Payri and Meinesz 1985: 505; Lewis and Norris 

1987: 12; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 62; South and Yen 1992: 128; Verheij and Prud'homme 

van Reine 1993: 157, pl. 10, fig. 8; Millar and Kraft 1994a: 19. 

Padina commersonii Bory 1827: 144; Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 178, fig. 51; Yamada and 

Tanaka 1938: 66; Dawson 1954: 401, fig. 17; 1956: 44; 1957: 110; Taylor 1950: 100, pl. 54, 

fig. 1; Womersley and Bailey 1969: 436. 

Padina boryana Thivy in Taylor 1966: 355, fig. 2 (type locality: Tonga); Jaasund 1976: 

45, fig. 91; 1977: 516; Papenfuss 1977: 276; Silva et al. 1987: 77; Tsuda 1991: 45. 

(Fig. 108' 

Fronds lightly calcified, flabellate, 10-25 mm long and 20-30 mm broad, zonate and 

light-orange to yellowish in colour. Thalli distromatic (sometimes tristromatic at the base), 

57-64(75) pm thick. Outer surface cells (18-25) X (21-28) pm, smaller than inner surface 

cells which measure (18-30) X (50-85) p,m. Sporangia 57-64 p,m in diameter, in non- 

indusiate sori occuring in concentric rows midway between hair bands on outer surface of 

frond. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Nauru, Solomon Islands, Micronesia, Tonga, French Polynesia, New Caledonia, 

Ryukyu Islands, Lord Howe Island, Indonesia, Taiwan, Tanzania. 


Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 200; South and Kasahara 1992: 54. 


Solnohu, Juju (USP 869); Fapufa (USP 870, S12: 10). 


Growing in relatively undisturbed shallow locations, attached to coral rubble. 

Thivy (in Taylor 1966: 353, Papenfuss (1977: 277), and Silva et al. (1987: 78) consider 

P. tenuis to be a misapplied name, allegedly based on C. Agardh's (1824: 264) Zonaria 

pavonia var. tenuis (which actually is Lobophora variegata), and redescribed the species as 

P. boryana based on type material from Tonga. Womersley and Bailey (1970: 292), after 

examination of the respective type specimens, more convincingly argue that Bory (1827: 

590) based his description on his own material from Mauritius, hence validating the name 

P. tenuis.


Dictyosiphonales 

Chnoosporaceae 

Chnoospora J. Agardh 1847 

Chnoospora minima (Hering) Papenfuss 1956: 69; Taylor 1960: 263, pl. 36, figs 3, 4; 

1966: 357; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 293; Tsuda 1972: 101, pl. 6, fig. 5; Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 39; Lu and Tseng 1984: 184, pl. 93, fig 2; Lewis 1985: 8; Lewis and Norris 

1987: 13; Silva et al. 1987: 79; Abbott 1989: 227; Littler et al. 1989: 120; Tsuda 1991: 44; 

Millar and Kraft 1994a: 24. 

Fucus minimus Hering 1841: 92 (type locality: 'Port Natal' (Durban), South Africa). 

Chnoospora atlantica J. Agardh 1847; Dickie 1874b. 

Chnoospora fastigiata J. Agardh 1848: 171; Borgesen 1941: 63. 

Chnoospora pacifica J. Agardh 1847: 7 (type locality: Pacific Mexico); Dawson 1954: 

405, fig. 20c; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 504. 

(Figs 96, 107) 

Plants dull brown in colour, stiff and up to 40 mm tall, with main axis repeatedly and 

fastigiately dichotomously branched. Branches 0.5-1 mm broad, broadened and flattened at 

points of division. Cryptoblasts 9 pm broad and up to 53 pm long present on older branches, 

being a characteristic feature of this genus (Fritsch 1945: 112). Plants attached to the 

substratum by a small discoidal holdfast. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Solomon Islands, Tahiti, Hawaii, Australia, Vietnam, Philippines, China, Taiwan, 

Ryukyu Islands, tropical Americas, South Africa. 




Lopta (L181 USP 358, "L30, *L31/ USP S5: 6, L381 USP 479, L39/ USP 478). 


Found on the reef crest, in exposed locations; typically occurring as clumps on the wave- 

washed rocks or hidden within Gelidiella acerosa and Chondria mats. 

Fucaies 

Sargassaceae 

Sargassum C. Agardh 1820 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Sargassum 

1. Main axis with Y-shaped proliferations ..................................... .S. polycystullz 

1: Main axis without proliferations ................................................. .S. sp. 

Sargassum polycystum C. Agardh 1824: 304 (type locality: Sunda Strait, Indonesia); 

Dickie 1874a: 190; J. Agardh 1889: 119; Howe 1932: 170; Dawson 1954: 406, fig. 22t, u; 

Durairatnam 1961: 46, pl. 10, figs 14-18; Taylor 1966; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 300; 

Tsuda 1972: 103, pl. 7, fig. 3; Jaasund 1976: 57, fig. 115; Chapman 1977: 162; Tsuda and 

Wray 1977: 102; Trono and Ganzon-Fortes 1980: 49; Chou and Chiang 1981: 134, pl. 2, figs 

1, 2; Lu and Tseng 1984: 236, pl. 119, fig. 1; Lewis 1985: 24; Trono 1986: 258, fig. 67;


Lewis and Norris 1987: 14; Silva et al. 1987: 87; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 62; Tsuda 199 1: 

46; Young-Meng et al. 1992: 35, figs 1 4. 

(Figs 97, 108a-c) 

Thallus up to 20 cm tall, colour yellow-brown to dark-brown, attached to substratum by a 

black, spongy discoid holdfast 6-8 mm in diameter. Main axis 0.5-1.0 mm in diameter, with 

distinctive short, Y-shaped proliferations up to 1 mm long abundant throughout the plant. 

Leaves thin, lanceolate with coarsely serrated margins 10-15 mm long and 2-3.5 mm broad, 

with acute apex, tapering base and distinct midrib. Cryptostomata randomly distributed. 

Pedunculate vesicles spherical, 2-3 mm in diameter and sometimes tipped with spinose 

extensions, typically arising solitarily from the base of leaves, and borne on a stalk 2.5-3 mm 

long. Receptacles not seen. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 167; Garbary et al. 1991: 253; South and Kasahara 1992: 55; Bishop 

Museum, Hawaii (BISH 512635,555 177-555 179). 


Maka Bay (MAK91 USP 355). 


Found attached to small rocks and coral in relatively shallow (1-1.5m) and sheltered 

locations in Maka Bay, just beyond the main Syringodium isoetijolium seagrass beds. Often 

floating and intertwined with Enteromorpha flexuosa. The bases of the older Sargassum 

plants are host to tufts of Sphacelaria rigidula. The Rotuman plants agree well with the 

description by Young-Meng et al. (1992). This alga is of cultural value to Rotumans, the 

dried and blackened leaves of the plant being an essential part of the traditional Rotuman 

dance costume and typically borne as a waist-belt together with a variety of angiosperm 

leaves and flowers. It is locally known as pe'pei. 

Sargassum sp. 

(Fig. 108d, e) 

Plants robust, 8-12 cm high, attached to the substratum via a complanate discoid holdfast 

1-2 cm in diameter. Main axis terete to slightly compressed, 2.5-3 mm at base and 1.5-2 

mm in middle portions, smooth with a knotty appearance from fallen main branches. Main 

branches slightly compressed, 1-1.5 mm in diameter, issued alternately in all planes. Leaves 

robust and cartilagineous, oblong-oblanceolate to linear-oblanceolate, (10)20-30 mm long 

and 4-8 mm wide. Base of leaves acute to acuminate, relatively symmetrical, with 

irregularly serrate margins and faint midrib. Tip of leaves acuminate; cryptostomata 

randomly distributed and slightly elevated. Vesicles elliptical to fusiform, 10-17 mm long 

and 3-5 mm broad, slightly compressed with a filiform coronal leaf. Stalk of vesicles terete 

to slightly compressed, cryptostomata present. Receptacular branches 4-5 mm long and 

0.8-1 mm wide, densely cymose and forked, up to three times equally dichotomously 

branched. Subtending leaf occasionally present. 


Sumara Point, Fapufa (USP 854, 910).



Growing in pools on the slopes of exposed rocky cliffs. This alga does not fit any 

description known to the author, and may represent a new species. It is distinctive because of 

its robust habit, smooth axes and fusiform to elliptical vesicles tipped with a filiform 

extension. 

Turbinaria Lamouroux 1828 

Turbinariu ornata (Turner) J . Agardh 1848: 266; Dickie 1874a: 190; Barton 1891: 219; 

Weber-van Bosse 1913a: 149; Okamura 1931: 104; Setchell 1935: 265; Yamada and Tanaka 

1938: 67; Taylor 1950: 10; pl. 53, fig. 2; pl. 55, fig. 2; 1963: 483, pl. 3, figs 1-6 (as var. 

orrzata); 1966: 358; Dawson 1954: 405; fig. 21; 1956: 44; 1957: 111; Moul 1957: 46; 

Levring 1960: 122; Durairatnam 1961: 40, pl. 27; Tsuda 1964: 8; Tsuda and Trono 1968: 

195; Trono 1969: 37; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 295; Tsuda 1972: 103, pl. 8, figs 1-3; 

Jaasund 1976: 53, fig. 105; Chapman 1977: 162; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 103; Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 55; Lu and Tseng 1984: 242, pl. 122, fig. 1; Lewis 1985: 25; Payri and Meinesz 

1985~: 506; Trono 1986: 261, fig. 70; Lewis and Norris 1987: 14; Silva et al. 1987: 89; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 63; Abbott 1989: 227; Tsuda 1991: 46; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 181; South and Yen 1992: 128; Verheij and Prud'homme 

van Reine 1993: 162, pl. 12, fig. 7. 

Fucus turbinatus Linnaeus var. ornatus Turner 1808: 50, pl. 24, figs c, d (type locality 

unknown). 

Plants up to 10 cm tall and 5.5 cm broad. Leaves 1-2 cm in diameter, with intramarginal 

teeth up to 3 mm high. Colour light brown to yellow, robust and attached to substratum by 

stilt-like haptera up to 2 mm in diameter and 25 mm long. Up to 18 leaves per plant; stems 

moderately branched. Leaves generally concave; coarse and firm, with terete stalks for about 

112 their length, terminally distended in a rounded to obpyramidal manner with obtuse 

ridges. Up to 13 marginal crown teeth on periphery of leaves, and up to 6 often paired erect 

teeth arranged at about 120" angle over the peripheral surface of the blades. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 167; South 1991: 7; South and Kasahara 1992: 55. 


Lopta, Oinafa (0701 USP 356). 


Plants semi-encrusting, growing mostly on the outer reef crest in moderate to rough 

exposures. Conspicuous on rocky surfaces by their solitary habit, but sometimes occurring in 

groups of 3 or 4 plants. Quite prominent at Oinafa and Lopta, being one of the dominant 

species on the reef crest along with Chondria sedifolia, Gelidiella acerosa and Hypnea 

nidulans, the latter often competing with Turbinaria for space as it is not uncommon to find 

clumps of Turbinaria ornata overgrown by extensive mats of Hypnea nidulans. (e.g. at 

Lopta).

Rhodophyceae 

Bangiophycidae 

Bangiales 

Erythropeltidaceae 

Erythrotrichia J.E. Areschoug 1850 

Erythrotrichia carnea (Dillwyn) J . Agardh 1883: 15, pl. I, figs 8-10; Weber-van Bosse 

1921: 188; Bargesen 1924: 268; Taylor 1928: 133, pl. 20, figs 4, 5; 1942: 76; 1950: 117; 

1957: 202, pl. 28, figs 13-15; 1960: 292; Dawson 1953: 10; 1956: 45; 1957: 11 1, fig. 16c; 

Durairatnam 1961: 47, pl. 11, figs 3, 4; Trono 1969: 42; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 300; 

Dawes 1974: 117; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 105; Cribb 1983: 10, pl. 1, figs 4-6; Lewis and 

Norris 1987: 14 (f. tenuis Tanaka); Santelices and Abbott 1987: 8; Tsuda 1991: 50; Millar 

and Kraft 1993: 4; Womersley 1994: 28, fig. 2A-D. 

Confewa carnea Dillwyn 1805: 54, pl. 84 (type locality: Glamorganshire, Wales). 

Bangia ceramicola Sluiter 1908. 

Erythrotrichia biseriata Tanaka (sensu Yoshida et al. 1990 and Tsuda 1991). 

(Figs 109, 118) 

Plants composed of single terete filaments 75-350 pm long and 15-20 pm in diameter, 

tapering towards the base and attached via a lobed basal cell. Cells longer than broad 17-25 

pm long, with axial chromatophores and a single central pyrenoid. Collections sterile. 

Distribution 

Tropical regions of the Pacific and Indian Oceans. 


Garbary et al. 1991: 254; South 1991: 7; South and Kasahara 1992: 55; Raj 1993: 54, 

fig. 21. 


Lopta ("291 USP S5: 20). 


Epiphytic on Chnoospora minima, on the reef crest. 

Florideophycidae 

Acrochaetiales 

Acrochaetiaceae 

Audouinella Bory 1823: 340 

Considering the confused state of Acrochaetid classification (see South and Tittley 1986), 

the nomenclature given here follows a monogeneric scheme as advocated by Dixon and 

Irvine (1 977), Garbary (1979) and Woelkerling (1983). 

Audouinella polyblasta (Rosenvinge) J. Price, Lawson et John 1986: 24; South and 

Tittley 1986: 3. 

Chantransia polyblasta Rosenvinge 1909 (type locality unknown). 

Chantransia hallandica Kylin 1906: 123, fig. 8 (type locality: Hogardsgrund, Halland, 

Sweden); Rosenvinge 1909: 93, figs 21-23.


Acrochaetium hallandicum (Kylin) Hamel 1927: 20, 82; Silva et al. 1987: 19. 

Audouinella hallandica (Kylin) Woelkerling 1973: 82, figs 14; Schneider 1983: 9. 

Acrochaetium sargassi Borgesen 19 15: 17, fig. 7-10 (Type locality: St Thomas, Virgin Is; 

vide Woelkerling 1973: 84); Weber-van Bosse 1921: 193; Taylor 1928: 134, pl. 22 figs 1-5; 

1960: 306; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 301. 

(Fig. 119) 

Plants epiphytic, up to 415 ym high, with inconspicuous sporal basal cell giving rise to 

1-2 axes. Erect filaments 7-10 p,m in diameter, irregularly branched with individual cells 

cylindrical, generally 2 diameters long, with parietal lobate chromoplast. Monosporangia 

ovoid, 7-8 I-Lm wide and 9-10 pm long, borne on short side branchlets adaxially disposed 

over the erect filaments. 

Distribution 





Hapmafau (*HAP411 USP S4: 7). 


Epiphytic on Gelidium pusillum within algal carpets on exposed rock. 

Bonnemaisoniales 

Galaxauraceae 

Actinotrichia Decaisne 

Actinotrichia fragilis (Forsskil) Borgesen 1932: 6; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 69; 

Dawson 1954: 416, fig. 28b; 1956: 46; Durairatnam 1961: 49; Trono 1969: 45; Womersley 

and Bailey 1970: 302; Jaasund 1976: 65, fig. 131; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 103; Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 57; Cribb 1983: 25, pl. 8, fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 5; Tseng et al. 1984: 58, pl. 32, 

fig. 1; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 511; Lewis and Norris 1987: 15; Silva et al. 1987: 22; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 63; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 18 1; Ohba and 


Fucus fragilis Forsskdl 1775: 190 (type locality: Mokha, Yemen). 

Actinotrichia rigida (Lamouroux) Decaisne 1842: 18; Montagne 1844: 659; Dickie 

1874a: 196, 244; Okamura 1916(1916-1923): 30, pl. 158, figs 17-19; Weber-van Bosse 

1921: 207, pl. 6 figs 1-2; Lewis 1984: 5; Payri and Meinesz 1985~: 51 1. 

Galaxaura rigida Lamouroux 1816: 26, pl. 8, fig. 4 (Type locality: 'la mer des Indes'). 

(Fig. 113) 

Plants up to 2 cm high, reddish-brown in colour, forming dichotomously branched thalli; 

angle of branching 30-40" below, 85-90" at the tips. Segments terete, 380-440 ym in 

diameter, provided with characteristic closely-spaced, annular pigmented hair-like filaments 

3-6 ym thick. Collections sterile. 

Distribution 

Tropical Indian and Pacific Oceans.



Chapman 1971: 168; Kasahara 1985: 44; South 1991: 7; South and Kasahara 1992: 56; 

Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 623702,623709,623717,623723). 




Tide pools, middle reef. 

Galaraura Lamouroux 18 12 

Galaxaura filarnentosa Chou in Taylor 1945: 139 (type locality: Sulphur Bay, Clarion 

Island, Revilla Gigedo, Mexico); Chou 1945: 39, pl. 1, figs 1-6; pl. 6, fig. 1; Dawson 1954: 

419, fig. 30a; 1956: 46; 1457: 113; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 303; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 

106; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 67; Silva et al. 1987: 23. 

Galaxaura rudis Kjellman 1900 sensu Kasahara 1985 and Silva et al. 1987; but G. rudis 

included in Galaxaura rugosa (Ellis et Solander) Lamouroux according to Huisman and 

Borowitzka 1990. Papenfuss et al. (1982) include G. rudis as a taxonomic synonym of 

G. lapidescens (Ellis et Solander) Lamouroux. See remarks below. 

Plants 2.5-3 cm high, bushy and hirsute, attached to substratum via a small discoidal 

holdfast. Branches whitish pink, terete, densely covered with fine dark red extended 

assimilatory filaments 18-25 pm in diameter and 1-4 mm long. Axial and assimilatory 

filaments structurally homogenous, with absence of tumid basal cells and with 

undifferentiated supporting cells. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Mexico, Vietnam, Micronesia, Hawaii; Solomon Islands, Ryukyu Islands, Fiji. 


Kasahara 1985: 47, pl. 7 fig. 4, pl. 15, fig. D; Garbary et al. 1991: 255; South 1991: 7; 

South and Kasahara 1992: 56. 


Sumara Point, Fapufa (USP 872, 873). 


Growing attached to rocky substratum, in exposed tidal pool. The Rotuman plants agree 

well with the description by Chou (1945), particularly concerning the absence of tumid basal 

cells. Chou (1945: 40) is of the opinion that G. rudis is distinct from G. filamentosa, in that 

the former has well developed supporting and tumid basal cells, as described by Kjellman 

(1900). 

Gelidiales 

Gelidiellaceae 

Gelidiella Feldmann et Hamel 1934 

Gelidiella acerosa (Forsskll) Feldmann et Hamel 1934: 5331; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 

71; Dawson 1953: 82; 1954: 422, fig 33g; Kylin 1956: 138; Taylor 1960: 35 1, pl. 46, fig. 5; 

Durairatnam 1961: 50, pl. 11, fig. 10; Chapman 1963: 74, fig. 69a, b; Womersley and Bailey 

1970: 304; Trono 1969: 48, pl. 6, fig. 5; 1972a: 103; 1973d: 15, pl. 7, fig. 26; Dawes 1974:


119; Jaasund 1976: 71, fig. 142; Woelkerling 1976: 128, figs 219-222; Tsuda and Wray 

1977: 106; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 69; Cribb 1983: 29, pl. 6, fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 11; 

Tseng et al. 1984: 69, pl. 35, fig. 4; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 512; Santelices and Stewart 

1985: 21, fig. 6; Trono 1986: 262, fig. 71; Lewis and Norris 1987: 17; Silva et al. 1987: 25; 

Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 65; Littler et al. 1989: 172; Tsuda 1991: 52; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 182; Norris 1992: 35, fig. 20; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 31; 

Price and Scott 1992: 25, fig. 4A-E; South and Yen 1992: 128; Millar and Kraft 1993: 11; 

Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 182; Wynne 1993: 9. 

Fucus acerosus ForsskHl 1775: 190 (type locality: Mokha, Yemen). 

Fucus rigidus Vahl 1802: 46 (type locality: St. Croix, Virgin Island). 

Fucus spinifornzis Lamouroux 1805: 77, pl. XXXVI figs 3, 4 ('spinaeformis') (syntype 

localities: Malagasy Republic; Mauritius). 

Gelidium spiniforme (Lamouroux) Lamouroux 1813: 129; Montagne 1844: 662. 

Sphaerococcus rigidus C. Agardh 1822a: 285. 

Gelidium rigidum (C. Agardh) Greville 1830: vii; Dickie 1876: 243, 244; Okamura 1909 

(1909-1912): 33, pl. 59, figs 1-6; Howe 1932: 169. 

Gelidiopsis rigida (C. Agardh) Weber-van Bosse 1904a: 104; Okamura 1912 (1909- 

1912): 188 (both 'rigidum'). 

Gelidiopsis rigida (Vahl) Weber-van Bosse 1928: 427, fig. 172 (sensu Womersley and 

Bailey 1970). 

Echinocaulon acerosum (ForsskHl) Borgesen 1932: 5, pl. 1, fig. 3 (sensu Womersley and 

Bailey 1970). 

(Figs 110, 120a, b) 

Thallus up to 5 cm high, greenish-yellow to dull purple, tough and wiry with decumbent 

basal parts attached by haptera and bearing free elongate, erect or arcuate-recurved 

secondary branchlets. Branchlets 458-500 p,m in diameter, terete to slightly compressed, up 

to 45 mm long and 1 mm in diameter, bearing terete filiform and determinate branchlets 2-8 

mm long mostly secundly (sometimes radially) or bilaterally disposed. Apical cell about 12 

pm in diameter, single and distinctly separated. External cortical cells anticlinally elongated; 

internal cortical cells somewhat rounded, grading into a medulla of elongate cells about 

12-18 pm in diameter, sometimes up to 30 Fm. Tetrasporic branches irregularly disposed, 

with 26-30 oblong-cruciate sporangia up to 33 X 65 p,m progressively developed from the 

apex, and irregularly disposed below the cortical cells. Cystocarps not seen. 

Distribution 



Chapman 1971: 169; Kasahara 1985: 52; South 1991: 8; South and Kasahara 1992: 57; in 

Herb Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 530729,623672,623708,623720). 


Hapmafau (HAP401 USP 421); Lopta (L171 USP 348, *L43/ USP S4: 19). 


At Lopta, found on the outer reef crest in very exposed conditions associated with 

Laurencia venusta Yamada and Chondria sedifolia Harvey, which together form the 

dominant cover. At Hapmafau, however, the same species (albeit about half as large) is 

found within Valonia aegagropila mats covering exposed beach rock or the back reef in 

relatively sheltered conditions. Hence, this plant seems to be present in two extremes of 

exposure at two opposite sites on the island, and has correspondingly different habits.

Gelidium Lamouroux 18 13 

Gelidiumpusillum (Stackhouse) Le Jolis 1863: 139; Feldmann and Hamel 1934: 112, fig. 

19; Dawson 1953: 62; 1954: 420, fig. 31a-c; 1956: 46; 1957: 113; Taylor 1960: 354, pl. 45, 

fig. 4; Durairatnam 1961: 50, pl. 13, figs 1-5; Chapman 1963: 72, fig. 67; Tsuda 1964: 9; 

Segawa 1965: 63, pl. 36, fig. 276; Trono 1969: 47; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 305; Dawes 

1974: 120; Jaasund 1976: 71, fig. 144; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 106; Ngan and Price 1979: 10; 

Lewis 1984: 10; Tseng et al. 1984: 68, pl. 37, fig. 1; Lewis and Norris 1987: 17; Santelices 

and Abbott 1987: 8; Silva et al. 1987: 26; Abbott 1989: 228; Littler et al. 1989: 170; Hatta 

and Prud'homme van Reine 1991: 364, figs 8-10; Tsuda 1991: 52; Coppejans and 

Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 182; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 30; South and Yen 1992: 128; 

Millar and Kraft 1993: 11; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 182; Wynne 1993: 9; 

Womersley 1994: 133, figs 35E, 39E-K. 

Fucus pusillus Stackhouse 1795 (1795-1801): 16, pl. vi (type locality: Sidmouth, 

Devonshire, England). 

Acrocarpus pusillus (Stackhouse) Kiitzing 1849: 762. 

(Figs 111, 112, 196) 

Plants dark purple, up to 4 mm high, forming compact tufts attached to the substratum via 

disc-like haptera. Erect blades distally terete and constricted, proximally compressed to 

flattened, strap-shaped; pinnate branches occasionally on the same plant. Apical cell single, 

distinct, and often protruding. Internal rhyzines sparse, mostly intermixed with innermost 

cortical cells and outermost medullary cells. Collections sterile. 

Distribution 

Cosmopolitan in warm and temperate waters. 


Chapman 1971: 168; South and Kasahara 1992: 58; Raj 1993: 49, fig. 22. 


Found at most sites. Representative material: 'Ahau (*A31 USP S4: 18). 


Forms compact tufts on coral rock, back reef. 

Nemaliales 

Liagoraceae 

Liagora Lamouroux 18 12 

Liagora valida Harvey 1853: 138, pl. 31A (type locality: Sand Key, Florida, USA); 

Okamura 1931: 109; Abbott 1945: 160, figs 12, 13; Taylor 1950: 120, pl. 56, fig. 1; 1960: 

327, pl. 43, fig. 2; Chapman 1963: 59, fig. 56a, b; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 109; Lewis 1984: 

4; Lewis and Norris 1987: 15; Silva et al. 1987: 21; Abbott 1989: 229. 

(Figs 114, 121) 

Plants light-pink, to 8 cm in diameter, flaccid and heavily calcified, forming densely 

branched, segmented clumps with regularly dichotomous branching. Assimilatory filaments 

350-450 ym long, generally 4 times dichotomous 10-1 1 ym in diameter, irregularly 

corymbose at the tips. Only female gametophytes with carpogonial branches collected.


Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Hawaii, northern Australia, Philippines, Taiwan, Jamaica, tropical 

Americas. 




Hofka; Lopta (L361 USP 481, "L481 USP S7: 14). 


Grows within shallow rocky depressions on outer reef. Specimens were examined by 

Professor Isabella Abbott at the University of Hawaii, who, in the absence of male plants 

which are required to identify the species, tentatively confirmed them as belonging to 

L. valida. 

Cryptonemiales 

Peyssonneliaceae 

Peyssorznelia Decaisne 1841 

Peyssonnelia sp. 

(Figs 116, 122, 123) 

Plants dark red to pink, with lightly calcified hypothallus; crustose to lamellate with 

overlapping shelves or lobes forming rosettes up to 15 mm in diameter and up to 530 pm 

thick, with longitudinal striations on upper surface of thallus. Hypothallus composed of 

subrectangular cells up to 25 by 18 km. Penthallus composed of unbranched, erect rows of 

cells 6-10 pm in diameter. Thalli loosely attached to substratum via unicellular rhizoids. 

Plants sterile. 


Hapmafau (HAP451 USP 450), Kelega (Kll USP 449). 


Found attached to rocks or coral shelves on outer reef in sunny but wave-protected sites. 

This species most closely resembles P. rubra var. orientalis Weber-van Bosse 1921: 270, 

figs 86-89 (Okamura 1931: 112; Taylor 1950: 121; Dawson 1953: 104, pl. 10, figs 8, 9; 

1954: 424, fig. 36c; 1956: 47; 1957: 114; Denizot 1968: 122; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 8), 

based on vegetative characters, but a definite identification is not possible owing to a lack of 

fertile material. 

Corallinales 

Corallinaceae 

Cheilosporum (Decaisne) Zanardini 1844: 187 

Cheilosporum spectabile Harvey ex Grunow 1874: 41 (type locality: Tonga); Weber-van 

Bosse 1904: 106; Beirgesen 1935: 51, fig. 23; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 314, pl. 26, fig. 

22; Ngan and Price 1979: 10; Yoshida et al. 1990: 290.

(Figs 117, 124) 

Plants up to 30 mm high, dark pink, bushy and calcified with dichotomous branching. 

Individual lobes up to 3 mm across and 850 ym wide, with rounded or acute apices. Lobe 

angle 55-70' (see Johansen 1977: 176, fig. 26 for lobe-angle calculation). Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Solomon Islands, Australia, Indonesia, Japan, India. 


Grunow 1874; South and Kasahara 1992: 59. 


'Ahau (A21 USP 452, *A41 USP S6: 2); Lopta (*L45/ USP S6: 1); Hapmafau ("HAP541 

USP S6: 3). 


Grows hanging from coral ledges on the reef rim, often shaded and exposed to 

considerable wave action. At very exposed sites (e.g. Lopta) the lobes of the plants are 

rounded, whereas in relatively calmer locations (Hapmafau) they are noticeably more acute. 

This observation agrees with Womersley and Bailey's comment (1970: 314) that lobe shape 

in this species could be a response to the amount of exposure, crowding or other variables. 

Hydrolithon Foslie 1909 

Hydrolithon farinosum (Lamouroux) Penrose et Chamberlain 1993: 295-303, figs 1-19. 

Melobesia farinosa Lamouroux 1816: 315, pl. XI1 fig. 3 (type locality: Mediterranean Sea 

fide Chamberlain 1983: 343). 

Fosliella farinosa (Lamouroux) Howe 1920: 588; Taylor 1950: 132; 1960: 388; Dawson 

1954: 425, fig. 37c; 1956: 49; 1957: 114; 1960: 30, pl. 21, fig. 1; pl. 22, fig. 1; Chapman 

1963: 91, fig. 92; Trono 1969: 51; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 309; Dawes 1974: 123; 

Gordon et al. 1976: 255, figs 1-4; Chamberlain 1977: 344, figs 1-20; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 

106; Cribb 1983: 48, pl. 51, figs 1, 2; Lewis 1984: 14 (var. chalicodictyon); Tseng et al. 

1984: 76, pl. 41, fig. 4; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 512; Silva et al. 1987: 34; Garrigue and 

Tsuda 1988: 64; Tsuda 1991: 51; Millar and Kraft 1993: 13. 

(Fig. 140) 

Thallus thin and epiphytic, pink-mauve in colour; monostromatic with lobed or rounded 

margins. Cells quadrangular, up to 20 pm long and 12 ym wide, arranged in more or less 

radiating rows with the cells of adjacent rows sometimes anastomosing. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Cosmopolitan. 


Grunow 1874; Chapman 1971: 169; South and Kasahara 1992: 59 (all as Fosliella 

farinosa (Lamouroux) Howe). 


Hofka (*H227/ USP S6: 12).



Epiphytic on Chondria dasyphylla, middle reef tidal pool. The genus Fosliella has been 

transferred to the genus Hydrolithon Foslie 1909 by Penrose and Chamberlain (1993), based 

on characteristics of the tetrasporangial conceptacles. 

Jania Lamouroux 1812: 186 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Janiu 

1. Thallus not tufted or cushion-like, repent, to 10 mm high; angle of branching more than 45" 

..................................................................... J. adhaerens 

1: Thallus tufted and erect, forming dense cushions to 20 mm high; angle of branching 25-30" ....... 

........................................................................ J.rubens 

Jania adhaerens Lamouroux 1816: 270 (type locality: 'MCditerrante?'); Taylor 1960: 

413, pl. 49, figs 1, 2 ('adherens'); Chapman 1963: 86, fig. 85; Tsuda 1964: 10; Dawes 1974: 

124; Jaasund 1976: 77, fig. 154; Woelkerling 1976: 132, figs 257-259; Tsuda and Wray 

1977: 108; Ngan and Price 1979: 10; Cribb 1983: 47, pl. 10, figs 4,5; Lewis 1984: 14; Tseng 

et al. 1984: 90, pl. 48, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 513; Lewis and Norris 1987: 18; 

Silva et al. 1987: 34; Littler et al. 1989: 204; Tsuda 1991: 54; Price and Scott 1992: 48, fig. 

12A-C; South and Yen 1992: 129. 

(Fig. 126) 

Plants erect to repent, up to 10 mm high, branching at angles of more than 45". Branches 

190-200 pm in diameter, the segments 3-5 diameters long with articulations at the base of 

each branch and often between forkings. Apex of branches conical, roundish to acute. Plants 

sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Nauru, Micronesia, Tahiti; Australia, Taiwan, Philippines, Japan, China, Caribbean, 

Tanzania. 




Kelega (K2/ USP 559); Lopta (*L49/ USP S7: 15); common at most sites around the 

island. 


Epiphytic on larger algae or corals, or attached to rocks in tide pools and back reef sites. 

Jania rubens (Linnaeus) Lamouroux 1816: 272, pl. 9, figs 6, 7; Setchell 1935: 228; 

Taylor 1950: 133; 1960: 413, pl. 49, fig. 3; Chapman 1955: 356; 1963: 85, fig. 84; 

Womersley and Bailey 1970: 314; Haritonidis and Tsekos 1976: 281; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 

108; Lewis 1984: 15; Payri and Meinesz 1985~: 513; Silva et al. 1987: 35; Littler et al. 

1989: 206; Yoshida et al. 1990: 291; Millar and Kraft 1993: 14. 

Corallina rubens Linnaeus 1758: 806 (type locality: Europe). 

- (Figs 125~4, 141) 

Plants pink-red, tufted and erect, forming extended, tightly packed cushions up to 20 mm 

high. Branching dichotomous, the angle narrow (less than 45", typically about 25-30")

esulting in the forks appearing nearly parallel to each other. Branches 115-170 pm in 

diameter, composed of segments 320-410 Fm long held together by flexible joints. 

Tetrasporangial conceptacles terminal and vasiform; spermatangial conceptacles terminal, 

lanceolate to fusiform. Cystocarps not seen. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Bikini Atoll, Tuvalu, Tahiti, Solomon Islands, Micronesia, Lord Howe Island, 

northern Australia, Philippines, Japan, Caribbean, Greece. 


New published record; in Herb Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 535460,535461). 


Lopta (L411 USP 560). 


Grows as tightly-packed clumps attached to rocks or coral debris, on the outer reef and in 

tide pools. 

Lithophyllum Philippi 1837: 389 

Lithophyllum tamiense Heydrich 1897: 1, figs 4-7 (type locality: Tami Island, Papua 

New Guinea).Verheij 1993: 43, figs 19-26; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 179. 

Lithophyllum tamiense Heydrich 1897: 1; 1901: 419; Foslie 1900a: 16; 1901c: 17; 

Woelkerling and Campbell 1992. 

Lithothamnion moluccense Foslie 1897: 12. 

Lithophyllum moluccense (Foslie) Foslie 1901a: 12; 1901b: 17; 1904: 65-69; Gordon et 

al. 1976: 270-272. 

Goniolithon moluccense (Foslie) Foslie 1898: 8; 1900b: 10, 11; 1901b: 17. 

Lithothamnion pygmaeum Heydrich 1897: 3. 

Goniolithon pygmaeum (Heydrich) Foslie 1898: 8. 

Lithophyllum torquescens Foslie 1901a: 1 1; 1901c: 23, 24. 

Lithophyllum moluccense f, torquescens Foslie 1904: 69,70. 

(Fig. 115) 

Plants to 5 cm high; crustose base bearing cylindrical branches up to 8 mm long and 

2 mm in diameter, with rounded ends. Thallus pseudoparenchymatous; cells of adjacent 

filaments connected by secondary pit connections. Filaments terminated by a single, larger, 

rounded epithallial cell 9-10 Fm in diameter and 3-5 km long, and 1 subepithallial 

meristematic cell producing new epithallial cells outwardly or additional vegetative cells 

inwardly. Tetrasporangial conceptacles 300-325 pm in diameter and 120-130 pm in height; 

conceptacle floor 7-8-cells below thallus surface with conceptacle roof 3-4 cells thick. 

Columella well developed, with conceptacle raised about 50% from thallus surface. Old and 

empty conceptacles buried. 

Distribution 

Tropical Indo-Pacific, West Indies. 





Common at most sites. Representative material: Kelega (K2/ USP 616). 


On the exposed outer reef, where it occurs as more or less eroded concretions attached to 

the coral rubble. 

Gigartinales 

Gracilariaceae 

Gracilaria Greville 1830: 121 

Gracilaria sp. aff. G. textorii (Suringar) De Toni 1895: 27; Xia and Yamamoto 1985: 69, 

figs 24-31; Millar and Kraft 1993: 28. 

Thallus foliose, consisting of irregularly dichotomous blades with rounded apices and 

smooth margins. Medullary cells ovate to ovoid, 80-125 pm in diameter; cortex distromatic, 

the outermost layer of pyriform to spherical cells 8-12 pm in diameter, the inner layer of 

ovate to spherical cells 30-50 pm in diameter. Plants sterile. 


Maka Bay (MAK20/ USP 614). 


Growing abundantly within the seagrass beds in Maka Bay, in association with 

Sargassum polycystum and Enteromorpha jlexuosa. Owing to a lack of fertile material, this 

species of Gracilaria cannot be definitively identified. However, from its habit and internal 

structure it most closely resembles G. textorii (Suringar) De Toni. 

Hypneaceae 

Hypnea Lamouroux 18 13: 13 1 

Hypnea nidulans Setchell 1924: 161, fig. 30 (type locality: Tutuila Island, American 

Samoa); Weber-van Bosse 1928: 454, fig. 192; Okamura 1931: 114; Tanaka 1941: 246, figs 

18, 19; Dawson 1954: 438, fig. 46e-g; 1957: 115; Tsuda 1964: 9; Jaasund 1976: 97, fig. 197; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 108; Lewis 1984: 35; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 512; Lewis and 

Norris 1987: 20; Silva et al. 1987: 50. 

Hypnea nidulans is included within H. pannosa J. Agardh (1847: 14) by the following 

authors: Womersley and Bailey (1970: 319); Kasahara (1985: 62); Tsuda (1991: 54); Price 

and Scott (1992: 38), but both species are recognised by Silva et al. (1987: 50). 

(Fig. 136) 

Thallus purple-pink, up to 2 cm high, with mostly terete axes up to 1 mm broad. 

Branching irregular, with arcuate tendency for the axis and branches. Branches not 

constricted at the base, terminating in sharply acute apices. Medulla up to 740 pm in 

diameter, consisting of a central axial cell giving way radially to medullary cells up to 200 

p,m in diameter. Lenticular thickenings present in some medullary cells. Inner cortical cells 

23-30 ym in diameter; pigmented epidermal cells 8-9 pm in diameter. Apical cell single, 

prominent, up to 10 p,m in diameter.

Distribution 



New record for Fiji (but see note above). 


Lopta (L21/ USP 349). 

A. D. R. N'Yeurt 


Growing as extensive mats on the outer reef crest in very exposed locations (e.g. Lopta 

reef). Often the dominant cover, it is not uncommon to find this species competing for space 

with (and sometimes overgrowing) other reef-crest algae such as Turbinaria ornata (one 

small Turbinaria plant was totally engulfed by the Hypnea thallus). The Rotuman plants 

closely resemble H. nidulans Setchell as described by Tanaka (1941: 246). 

Solieriaceae 

Meristotheca J. Agardh 1872 

Meristotheca procumbens P. Gabrielson et Kraft 1984: 241, fig. 14A-D (type locality: 

Lord Howe Island, Australia); Millar and Kraft 1993: 26; N'Yeurt 1995: 243, figs 3-10. 

(Figs 137,142-147,203-205) 

Plants deep pink and turgid when fresh, procumbent, up to 10 cm in diameter, irregularly 

branched and lobed. Thalli attached at various points to supporting coral via terete haptera up 

to 2 mm long. Fronds up to 800 pm in thickness, composed of an inner medulla of 

predominantly rhizoidal filaments (40% of thallus) surrounded on both sides by equal 

thicknesses of a cortex grading from large unpigmented stellate-ovate cells up to 95 pm in 

diameter to a surface layer of small pigmented rectangular cortical cells up to 10 X 20 km. 

Cystocarps and tetrasporangia absent from Rotuman specimens collected by the author in 

May, June and December, January, although described by Gabrielson and Kraft (1984: 245) 

from Lord Howe specimens. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Lord Howe Island, New South Wales, Australia. 


New published record for Fiji. In Herb. Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 536995; 537010). 


Fapufa (F3/ USP 41 1); Hapmafau; Losa; Savlei; Tua'koi (T61 USP 351). Common on the 

north-west and south coasts. 


Growing at the base of Acropora coral debris in shallow lagoonal waters or tide pools. 

This alga is edible, being commonly collected by Rotumans to be made into a kind of gel 

pudding ('Lum mie'ta') (N'Yeurt 1995). The fresh alga is soaked in seawater, cleaned of 

coral debris, and boiled in coconut cream, then garnished with onions and fish. (Fig. 205). 

Specimens of this genus (identified as Meristotheca sp.) were located by the author in the 

collections of the Bernice P. Bishop Museum Herbarium in Hawaii, having been collected in 

October 1975 and August 1977 from Rotuma and identified by W.E. Booth. These


specimens were loaned to the present author, and were found to be very similar to those 

collected for this study. 

Rhodymeniales 

Champiaceae 

Champia Desvaux 1809: 245 

Champia pawula (C. Agardh) Harvey 1853: 76; Okamura 1931: 112; Lucas 1935: 221; 

Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 76; Dawson 1954: 443, fig. 52c; 1956: 51; 1957: 116; Taylor 

1960: 490, pl. 61, fig. 4; Durairatnam 1961: 65; Chapman 1963: 120, fig. 125; Segawa 1965: 

100, fig. 467; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 321; Dawes 1974: 139, fig. 65; Jaasund 1976: 

99, fig. 203; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 105; Ngan and Price 1979: 14; Cribb 1983: 70, pl. 21 

fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 38; Tseng et al. 1984: 122, pl. 64, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 511; 

Heijs 1987: 147; Lewis and Norris 1987: 21; Silva et al. 1987: 53; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 

64; Abbott 1989: 229; Littler et al. 1989: 142; Millar 1990: 371; Tsuda 1991: 49; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 31; Price and Scott 1992: 55, fig. 14A-E; Millar and Kraft 1993: 29; Verheij 

and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 195. 

Chondria parvula C. Agardh 1824: 207 (type locality: Cfidiz, Spain). 

(Fig. 160) 

Thallus greyish-red to brownish, composed of turgid anastomosing branches up to 

0.5 mm in diameter. Branches terete, tapering and regularly constricted into cask-shaped 

segments; branch apex obtuse. Cortical layer composed of 2 distinct types of cells, 1 type 

ellipsoidal, 20-40 p,m in diameter and 50-60 pm long, the other smaller and isodiameteric 

10-12 pm in diameter. Unicellular hairs up to 100 pm long and 6 p.m in diameter are often 

present on the thallus, projecting at right angle from certain cortical cells. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Tropical and warm oceans in general. 


Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 201, fig. 28; South and Kasahara 1992: 62; in Herb Bishop 

Museum, Hawaii (BISH 528448). 


Maka Bay (*MAK14/ USP S4: 16). 


Epiphytic on Gracilaria sp. aff. G. textorii, back reef. 

Rhodymeniaceae 

Gelidiopsis Schmitz 1895 

Gelidiopsis intricata (C. Agardh) Vickers 1905: 61; Weber-van Bosse 1928: 425; 

Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 74, figs 6a-c; Dawson 1954: 423, fig. 34a-d; 1956: 46; 1957: 

113; Taylor 1960: 353; Tsuda 1964: 9; Trono 1969: 49; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 318; 

Jaasund 1976: 87, fig. 177; Tsuda 19766: 329; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 106; Cribb 1983: 56, 

pl. 13, figs I, 2; Lewis 1984: 24; Tseng et al. 1984: 100, pl. 53, fig. 4; Payri and Meinesz 

1985a: 512; Silva et al. 1987: 40; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 65; Abbott 1989: 229; Yoshida 

et al. 1990: 295; Tsuda 199 1 : 52; Ohba and Enomoto 1992: 3 1; Price and Scott 1992: 5 1, fig. 

13A-F; South and Yen 1992: 129; Millar and Kraft 1993: 32; Wynne 1993: 12.

Sphaerococcus intricatus C. Agardh 1822a: 333 (syntype localities: Mauritius; Hawaiian 

Island; 'Ravak' (Lawak); Waigeo Island; Moluccas; Indonesia). 

(Fig. 192) 

Thallus gregarious, up to 40 mm high and 150-350 ym in diameter; dark-reddish in 

colour with entangled, setaceous lower branches; upper parts dichotomously branched, 

flattened at dichotomies, with no distinct apical cell. Thallus cross-section composed of a 

medulla of small cells 7-10 pm in diameter, surrounded by a layer of elongated cortical cells 

2-5 km in diameter; loosely packed and ovoid in surface view. Sporangia borne terminally 

from branchlets, up to 970 pm high and 530-660 km broad, spatulate and containing 

cruciate tetraspores 23-24 pm in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Tahiti, New Caledonia, Hawaii, Nauru, Pitcairn Island, Solomon Islands, 

northern Australia, Papua New Guinea, Indonesia, Philippines, Maldives, China, Tanzania. 


Kasahara 1985: 60, pl. 9, fig. 4; South and Kasahara 1992: 61. 


Fapufa (F7/ USP 561); Jijlmea (J2/ USP 564, "571 USP S7: 16); Losa (LS1/ USP 562). 


Forming clumps in tide pools and beneath rocky ledges. Norris (1987) transfered the 

genus Gelidiopsis to Ceratodictyon Schmitz (1889: 443) based on culture results, but the 

separate status of these entities is maintained by Price and Kraft (1991), who emphasise 

distinct differences in reproductive anatomy and habit between the two genera. 

Coelarthrum Bergesen 19 10 

Coelarthrum boergesenii Weber-van Bosse 1928: 473, figs 207, 208 (syntype localities: 

Borneo; Saleyer Island; Paternoster Island, Indian Ocean); Bargesen 1944: 18, fig. 12; Tsuda 

and Wray 1977: 105; Cribb 1983: 68, pl. 20, figs 1-4; Lewis 1984: 37; Abbott 1989: 229; 

Tsuda 199 1 : 50. 

Coelarthrum coactum Okamura and Segawa in Segawa 1936. 

(Fig. 138a, b) 

Plants deep red, erect, up to 35 mm high, composed of hollow, globular dichotomous 

vesicles 2-5 mm high, narrow at the base and rounded at the top. Lateral ramifications and 

anastomosing of the vesicles common. Wall of vesicles Zlayered, the outer layer continuous 

and composed of obovoid cells 3-4 pm in diameter; the inner layer of much larger, closely- 

spaced ovoidal cells 28-42 ym wide. Cystocarps spread over vesicle surface. Gland cells not 

seen. 

Distribution 

Fiji, southern Marshall Islands, northern Australia, Hawaii, Ryukyu Islands, Indian Ocean. 

Fijian Record 




Ropure (Hapmak) (Rll USP 441). 


Found under overhanging coral at depths of 1-2 m towards the passage on the outer reef, 

associated with Hypnea nidulans and Dictyopteris repens. A number of small red algae 

(Grzrithsia subcylindrica, Herposiphonia sp.) were epiphytic. The Rotuma specimens were 

more than 15 mm high and hence larger than the f. minima described by Weber-van Bosse 

(1928: 474) and reported in the Pacific region (Dawson 1956: 51, fig. 47; Womersley and 

Bailey 1970: 320). 

Coelothrix Bgrgesen 1920: 389 

Coelothrix irregularis (Harvey) Borgesen 1920: 389; Dawson 1957: 115, fig. 23b; Taylor 

1960: 488, pl. 45, fig. 3; pl. 46, fig. 4; Chapman 1963: 117, fig. 121; Trono 1969: 66, pl. 6, 

fig. 6; pl. 7, fig. 5; Jaasund 1976: 101, fig. 208; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 105; Magruder and 

Hunt 1979: 63; Cribb 1983: 68; Lewis 1984: 37; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 511; Silva et al. 

1987: 52; Littler et al. 1989: 170; Tsuda 1991: 50; Price and Scott 1992: 60, fig. 17A-D; 

Millar and Kraft 1993: 3 1. 

Cordylecladia? irregularis Harvey 1853: 156 (type locality: Key West, Florida, USA). 

(Fig. 195a-b) 

Thallus up to 4 cm long and 600 p,m in diameter, firm and pliable; axes arcuate and 

creeping, bearing erect, terete branches 250450 p,m in diameter. Branch apices obtuse. 

Thallus multiaxial, hollow, with slender central cavity up to 200 ym in diameter surrounded 

by a compact layer of tissue 5-6 cells thick. Cortical cells cylindrical, 40-60 ym in diameter 

and up to 80 ym long; innermost cells slender, consisting of longitudinal axial filaments up 

to 35 km in diameter, often bearing subspherical gland cells 45-60 ym in diameter. Surface 

cells of 2 distinct types, some longitudinally elongate, elliptical, 40-100 ym long and up to 

30 p,m wide others isodiameteric, up to 25 km in diameter. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Tahiti, Hawaii, Australia, Philippines, Japan, tropical Americas, 

Caribbean, West Indies, Tanzania. 

Fijian Record 


Roturnan Distribution 



Growing intertwined with Laurencia sp. within seagrass beds, at 0.5-1 m depths. 

Rhodymeniu Greville 1830: 48 

Rhodymenia divaricata Dawson 1941: 141, pl. 23 fig. 31 (type locality: Guaymas Bay, 

Gonora, Mexico); Dawson 1963a: 460, pl. 89(13) fig. 2; Trono 1969: 65, pl. 8 fig. 6; Tsuda 

and Wray 1977: 11 1. 

(Figs 139, 161) 

Thallus violet-purple, 3-4 cm high, estipitate and expanding basally into an irregularly, 

divaricately dichotomous, complanate blade 270-280 krn thick and 3-8 mm broad, with


branching at intervals of 3-12 mm. Ultimate segments broadly rounded, lobed, consisting of 

a medulla 220-225 pm thick composed of 4 or 5 layers of cells up to 115 pm in diameter 

grading into a cortex of 1 or 2 layers of pigmented angular cells c. 5 X 13 ym. Outer 

medullary cells of lower portions of thallus filled with floridean starch grains 47-60 Fm in 

diameter. Tetraspores 25-32 pm in diameter, scattered below the cortex within the outer 

medulla. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Caroline Islands, Mexico. 

Fijian Record 



Maka Bay (MAK71 USP 352, MAK81 USP 353). 


Growing beneath tabular pavona coral on the outer-middle reef where it forms clumps up 

to 15 cm in diameter. 

Ceramiales 

Ceramiaceae 

Centroceras Kiitzing 184 1 : 73 1 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Centroceras 

1. Apices apiculate ....................................................... .C. apiculatunz 

1: Apices incurved-forcipate ............................................... .C. clavulaturn 

Centroceras apiculatum Yamada 1944: 42; Dawson 1956: 55, fig. 55; Cribb 1983: 75, 

pl. 26, fig. 1, pl. 57, figs 1,2; Price and Scott 1992: 79, fig. 24A-D; Wynne 1993: 12, fig. 6. 

(Figs 148-151, 163) 

Thalli up to 2.5 mm high and 117-140 pm in diameter, epiphytic via translucent rhizoids 

23-30 pm in diameter projecting from ventral surface of prostrate axes. Branching mostly 

simple, with apices apiculate, non-forcipate, terminating in a large apical cell 10-1 1 pm long 

which undergoes transverse division and from the basal part of which gradually flat, disc- 

shaped segments are cut off. Axial cells ovoid, 50-54 Fm in diameter. Thalli fully 

corticated; cortications in distinct pattern of horizontally-disposed subrectangular pericentral 

cells 7-15 pm in diameter at nodal points, and vertically-disposed, elongated ovoid cells 

14-20 pm between nodes. Internodal distances (between pit-connections of axial cells) 

4548 pm. Tetrasporangia cruciate, 30-35 pm in diameter, arranged in pairs in stichidia-like 

clavate branchlets up to 42 pm long and 20 pm broad. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, northern Australia, Maldives. 


Garbary et al. 1991: 254; South et al. 1993: 188. 


Hapmafau ("HAP571 USP S4: 10, *HAP581 USP S4: 11, *HAP591 USP S4: 12).



Epiphytic on Valonia aegagropila within algal carpet on exposed beach rock platforms. 

Centroceras clavulatum (C. Agardh) Montagne 1846: 140; Okamura 193 1 : 1 15; 

Bggesen 1935: 57; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 82; Taylor 1950: 139; 1960: 537; Dawson 

1954: 446, fig. 54b; Chapman 1955: 356; Dawson 1956: 55; 1957: 122; Moul 1957: 46; 

Durairatnam 1961: 66; Chapman 1963: 173, fig. 180; Segawa 1965: 106, fig. 504; Trono 

1969: 73; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 323; Dawes 1974: 143, fig. 68; Haritonidis and 

Tsekos 1976: 280; Jaasund 1976: 109, fig. 222; Tsuda 19766: 329; Woelkerling 1976: 120, 

figs 153-157; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 104; Magruder and Hunt 1979: 61; Ngan and Price 

1979: 14; Cribb 1983: 75, pl. 25, figs 2, 3; pl. 57, figs 1, 2; Lewis 1984: 40; Tseng et al. 

1984: 126, pl. 66, fig. 2; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 511; Lewis and Norris 1987: 21; 

Santelices and Abbott 1987: 9; Silva et al. 1987: 54; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 64; Abbott 

1989: 229; Littler et al. 1989: 144; Millar 1990: 390, figs 40E-G; Tsuda 1991: 49; 

Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 188; Price and Scott 1992: 81, figs 25A-E; 

Millar and Kraft 1993: 37. 

Ceramium clavulatum C. Agardh 1822b: 2 (type locality: Callao, Peru). 

Centroceras cryptacanthum Kutzing 1841: 741 (type locality: Antilles). 

Centroceras clavulatum (C. Agardh) Montagne var. cryptacanthum (Kutzing) Grunow 

1867: 65. 

Centroceras hyalacanthum Kiitzing 1841: 742 (type locality: 'Wahrscheinlich aus 

Westindien'),fide J. Agardh 1851 (1851-1863): 148-149. 

(Fig. 199) 

Thallus dark brownish-maroon 120-128 km in diameter; branching dichotomous with 

incurved forcipate apices. Thallus segmented; nodes with verticillate spines 1 or 2 cells long 

imparting characteristic light and dark banding pattern to axis. Internodes 135-150 km long 

in mid-thallus. No tetraspores observed on Rotuman specimens. 

Distribution 

Tropical and warm oceans. 

F&an Records 

Grunow 1874 ('var. hyalcanthum Kiitzing'); Chapman 1971: 170; South and Kasahara 

1992: 63. 


Lopta (*L52/ USP S7: 12). 


Occurs within Jania rubens clumps in association with various species of Ceramium. 

Ceramium Roth 1797: 146 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Ceramium 

1. Branching dichotomous ........................................................... .3 

1: Branching monopodial ........................................................... .2 

2. Plants to 0.6 mm high, cortication sparse with slender axial cells, not smooth at the edges ...... 

....................................................................... C. codii 

2: Plants to 1.3 mm high, cortication moderate with ovoid to globose axial cells, smooth at the 

edges ................................................................ C. vagans

3. Plants to 5 mm high; apices forcipate with sparse dichotomous branching; cortical band smooth at 

the edges, not curving upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. zacae 

3: Plants to 10 mm high; apices strongly circinate with dense and repeatedly dichotomous branching, 

cortical band bulging outwards at the edges and curving upwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C. mazatlanense 

Ceramium codii (Richards) Mazoyer 1938: 324; Taylor 1960: 526; Jaasund 1970b: 68, 

fig. IF, N, Dawes 1974: 145; Jaasund 1976: 107, fig. 216; Cribb 1983: 80, pl. 27, figs 1 4; 

Lewis 1984: 41; Millar 1990: 393, figs 41D-F; 43B; Yoshida et al. 1990: 300; Price and 

Scott 1992: 86, fig. 26A-D; Millar and Kraft 1993: 38. 

Ceramothamnion codii Richards 1901 : 264, pls 21, 22 (type locality: Bermuda). 

Ceramothamnion adriaticum Schiller 19 1 1 : 90. 

Ceramium serpens sensu Dawson 19626: 64, pl. 25, fig. 6 (vide Millar 1990: 393). 

(Figs 155a, b, 166) 

Plants epiphytic, bright red-maroon, up to 600 pm high and 29-47 pm in diameter. 

Branching straight, with rarely bifurcate tips and narrow cortical band. Axial cells elongate 

and slender, cylindrical, 51-54 pm long. Nodal cortical band 10-13 pm long, composed of 

one ring of larger, transversely elongate periaxial cells and 1 or 2 rings of irregularly 

arranged smaller cells. Acropetal and basipetal cortical cells single-layered, triangular to 

polygonal in surface view. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Australia, Japan, Caribbean, tropical Americas, Tanzania. 

Fijian Record 



Hof6a (*H226/ USP S4: 14). 


Epiphytic on Heterosiphonia subsecundata, the latter epiphytic on Melanamansia 

glomerata within tidal pools in middie reef. 

Ceramium mazatlanense Dawson 1950: 130, pl. 2, figs 14, 15 (type locality: Mazatlan, 

Sinaloa, Mexico); Dawson 1954: 448, fig. 55g-j; 1956: 53; 1957: 122; 1962: 59, pl. 23, figs 

1, 2; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 324; Jaasund 1970b: 67, fig. 1A; 1976: 107, fig. 215; 

Tsuda and Wray 1977: 104; Ngan and Price 1979: 14; Lewis 1984: 42; Silva et al. 1987: 55; 

Abbott 1989: 230; Tsuda 1991: 49; South and Yen 1992: 129. 

(Figs 156, 157, 165) 

Thalli up to 10 mm high and 190 ym in diameter, arising from a creeping axis 

200-250 pm in diameter attached to the substratum via hyaline rhizoids projecting from 

ventral nodal surfaces. Branching dense and repeatedly dichotomous, with strongly circinate 

apices. Cortication extensive, with narrow internodes 32-37 pm in middle of erect branches, 

becoming noticeably shorter (6-1 1 pm) towards the apex. Cortical bands 50-55 pm broad, 

bulging outward at the edges and curving upwards. Axial cells subglobular, 72-77 pm in 

diameter, from which arise a row of 6-8 periaxial cells giving rise to 2-3 rows of acropetally 

directed apical cells 5-10 pm in diameter, and a few basipetally directed irregularly disposed 

and angular axial cells 10-12 pm in diameter. Cystocarps 200-240 p.m in diameter, borne at 

dichotomies on branch apices. Carposporangia 25-35 pm in diameter.


Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Solomon Islands, Nauru, Hawaii, Australia, Philippines, Mexico, 

Tanzania. 


Garbary et al. 1991: 254 (as C. mazatlanse); South et al. 1993: 188. 


Lopta (*L44/ USP S5: 1, *L56/ USP S7: 10). 


Found within Jania rubens clumps, middle reef. 

Ceramium vagans PC. Silva in Silva et al. 1987: 56. 

Ceramium vagabundum Dawson 1957: 121, fig. 27e (as C. vagabunde) (type locality: 

Parry Island, Eniwetok Atoll, Marshall Island) (replaced name); Dawson 1954: 450, fig. 56b 

(as Ceramium sp.); 1962: 66, pl. 27 fig. 5; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 104; Lewis 1984: 43 (as C. 

vagabunde); Millar and Kraft 1993: 39 (as C. vagabunde). 

(Figs 154, 158, 159, 162) 

Thallus creeping, with erect monopodial branches 0.5-1.3 mm high and 133-180 ym in 

diameter, attached to the substratum via small hyaline rhizoids up to 250 Frn long and 

35 p,m wide projecting from ventral nodal surfaces. Branch apices not circinate or forcipate, 

blunt to slightly fusiform. Axial cells globose to ovoid, 50-62 ym in diameter, giving rise to 

a row of 6-8 periaxial cells 15-20 ym in diameter from which arise 2-5 rows of 

progressively smaller, irregularly disposed acropetally directed apical cells and 1 or 2 rows 

of larger, basapetally directed angular apical cells 7-12 ym in diameter. Cortical band 

smooth at the edges, 45-50 ym wide with internodal spaces 72-75 ym long in middle of 

erect branches. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Australia, Philippines, Vietnam, Mexico. 


Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 201; South and Kasahara 1992: 63 (both as C, vagabunde 

Dawson). 


Lopta (*L42/ USP S5: 2, S7: 10). 


Found with other Ceramium species within Jania rubens clump, middle reef. 

Ceramium zacae Setchell et Gardner 1937: 89, pl. 8 figs 22a-c (type locality: Bahia San 

BartolomC (Bahia Tortugas), Baja California Sur, Mexico); Dawson 1950: 134, pl. 2, figs 

27-28; 1957: 8; 1962: 67, pl. 26, figs 4-6; Fortes and Trono 1979: 60, fig. 11; Silva et al. 

1987: 56. 

(Figs 152, 153, 164) 

Thallus epiphytic, up to 5 mm high and 90-100 p,m in diameter, arising from prostrate 

filaments adhering by rhizoids from ventral nodal surfaces. Branching dichotomous, with

forcipate apices. Cortical band 57-60 ym in diameter and 4-5 rows wide, smooth at the 

margins and somewhat elongated and irregular acropetally; truncate basipetally. Axial cells 

ovoid; internodal areas 97-100 ym long. Periaxial cells 6-8, giving rise acropetally to 2 

rows of progressively smaller derivatives and basipetally to 1-2 rows of triangular to 

subrectangular derivatives. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Philippines, Mexico. 






Epiphytic on Valonia aegagropila on exposed rock platforms, back reef. 

Griffithsia C. Agardh 1817: 28 

Griffithsia subcylindrica Okamura 1930(1929-1932): 99, pl. 8; Cribb 1983: 92, pl. 24, 

fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 43; Tseng et al. 1984: 130, pl. 68, fig. 3; Millar 1990: 41 1, fig. 50E, F; 

Price and Scott 1992: 125, fig. 424, B; Millar and Kraft 1993: 40. 

(Fig. 168) 

Thallus light purple to red, up to 10 mm long; moniliform 160-300 ym in diameter, 

branching irregularly lateral. Cells ellipsoidal to subcylindrical, about 70 X 170 ym in 

middle of thallus. Basal rhizoidal filaments up to 50 pm in diameter, spaced at 50-170 ym 

intervals. Apical cells about 18 X 125 ym. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Australia, China, Japan. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau; Ropure (*R3/ USP S5: 17). 


Sandy tidal pools, in back reef locations. 

Wrangelia C. Agardh 1828: 136 

Wrangelia argus (Montagne) Montagne 1856: 444; Borgesen 1916: 116, figs 125, 126; 

Okamura 1935(1933-1942): 46, pl. 324; Dawson 1954: 444, fig. 54g; 1956: 56; 1957: 119; 

Taylor 1960: 502, pl. 66, figs 7, 8; Chapman 1963: 164, fig. 170a-e; Womersley and Bailey 

1970: 325; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 112; Cribb 1983: 94, pl. 66, fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 45; Tseng 

et al. 1984: 132, pl. 69, fig. 4; Silva et al. 1987: 57; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 67; Coppejans 

and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 188; Price and Scott 1992: 134, fig. 46A-E; Millar and 

Kraft 1993: 43.


GriSfithsia argus Montagne 1841 (1839-1842): 176, pl. 8, fig. 4 (type locality: Roque del 

Gando, Islas Cananas). 

Wrangelia tayloriana Tseng (sensu Tsuda 1991: 57). 

(Figs 167, 169-172) 

Plants in turf-like colonies, purple red with a slight iridescence; 5-7 mm high and 1.5-1.8 

mm broad, plumosely branched in 2 indistinct ranks. Main axis 41-58 km in diameter, 

uncorticated with determinate lateral branchlets 17-24 ym in diameter terminating in 

attenuate cells. Tetrasporangia 55-60 ym in diameter, surrounded by short-celled involucral 

filaments. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, New Caledonia, Solomon Islands, northern Australia, Indonesia, 

Philippines, Vietnam, China, Jamaica, tropical Americas. 


Kasahara 1985: 65, pl. 12, fig. 5; Garbary et al. 1991: 256; South 1991: 8; South and 

Kasahara 1992: 64. 


Hapmafau (*HAP3 1, *HAP321 USP S5: 14). 


Epiphytic on larger algae (e.g. Dictyota friabilis) in tidal pools. 

Dasyaceae 

Heterosiphoniu Montagne 1842b: 21 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Heterosiphonia 

1. Plants to 60 mm long, subrepent and lax with sparse determinate branches . . . H. crispella var. laxa 

1: Plants to 30 mm long, erect and dense with widely divaricating, distichous pseudolateral branches . . 

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H. subsecundata 

Heterosiphonia crispella (C. Agardh) Wynne var. laxa (BGrgesen) Wynne 1985: 87; 

Silva et al. 1987: 60; Abbott 1989: 230; Price and Scott 1992: 161, fig. 56A-D; Wynne 

1993: 15. 

Heterosiphonia wurdemannii (Bailey ex Harvey) Falkenberg var. laxa BGrgesen 1919: 

327, figs 327, 328 (type locality: St. Croix, Virgin Island); Taylor 1950: 140; Dawson 1956: 

57, fig. 60; 1957: 124; Taylor 1960: 565, pl. 72, fig. 9; Chapman 1963: 158, fig. 165; 

Dawson 1963b: 404, pl. 129(4), fig. 1; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 329; Jaasund 1976: 121, 

fig. 246; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 107; Cribb 1983: 105, pl. 64, fig. 1 (var. laxa); Lewis 1984: 

49 (var. laxa); Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 512; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 9. 

(Figs 175, 181) 

Plants subrepent, about 5-6 cm long, laxly and sparingly branched. Main axis ecorticate, 

composed of 4 pericentral cells each about 100 pm long, 70-80 pm in diameter. Branches 

mostly determinate with 3-4 times forked, mainly monosiphonous filaments 10-13 ym in 

diameter with terminal segments 4-15 cells long, bluntly tipped. Plants sterile.

Distribution 



Garbary et al. 1991: 255; South and Kasahara 1992: 64 ( both as Heterosiphonia 

wurdemannii (Bailey ex Harvey) Falkenberg var. laxa). 




Found as epiphytes on larger algae (e.g. Dictyota spp., Dictyopteris spp.) in sheltered tidal 

pools. Rotuman plants of this genus resemble var. laxa (Borgesen) Wynne but are noticeably 

smaller in axis diameter than those described in the literature (Taylor 1960; Dawson 1963). 

Heterosiphonia subsecundata (Suhr) Falkenberg 1901: 643, pl. 18, fig. 20. 

Dasya subsecundata Suhr 1840 (type locality unknown). 

Dasya subsecunda J. Agardh 1863: 118 1 (fide Falkenberg 1901) 

Heterosiphonia callithamnion Sonder; Parsons 1975: 61 7 vide Chapman 197 1: 170). 

Dasya callithamnion (Sonder) Harvey vide Chapman 197 1 : 170). 

(Figs 173, 174, 177, 179, 182, 183) 

Thalli up to 30 mm high, erect, with main axis 36-51 ym in diameter with 4 pericentral 

cells and bearing distichous, widely divaricating pseudolateral branches. Cells of 

pseudolateral branches 75-83 ym long and 25-35 ym broad. Tetrasporangial stichidia 

shortly pedicellate, fusiform, up to 225 ym long and 5 p,m in diameter, with distinct apical 

cell up to 10 ym high and borne laterally from thallus main axis. Tetrasporangia 15-25 km 

in diameter, irregularly disposed within stichidia. Carpogonium pedicellate, up to 116 krn 

high and 88 ym broad, bearing subrectangular carposporangia up to 8 ym in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, tropical seas. 


Chapman 1971: 170 (as H. subsecunda); South and Kasahara 1992: 64. 


Hofia (*H226/ USP S4: 14, *H228/ USP S4: 15); Ropure (*R2/ USP S5: 11). 


Found as epiphytes on Melanamansia glomerata, middle reef. 

Delesseriaceae 

Hypoglossum Kiitzing 1843: 444 

Hypoglossum caloglossoides Wynne and Kraft 1985: 20, figs 1-19 (type locality: Lord 

Howe Island, Australia); Price and Scott 1992: 137, fig. 47A-C; Millar and Kraft 1993: 46. 

Caloglossa vieillardii Setchell 1924: 161 (non Hypoglossum vieillardii Kiitzing 1866: 4). 

Caloglossa leprieurii f. pygmaea auct. non (von Martens) Post sensu Dawson 1956: 57, 

fig. 59; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 327; Wynne and Kraft 1985.


(Figs 176, 178, 180, 184) 

Plants delicate, creeping, up to 10 mm long and with regular patterns of constrictions 

(nodes and internodes) which are potential points of attachment of thallus to the substratum 

via multicellular holdfasts composed of numerous rhizoids terminating in subpeltate knobs. 

Blades up to 0.6 mm wide, with branching endogenous from the thallus midrib. A 

transversely dividing cell terminates each axis or blade, with all 3rd-order initials reaching 

the thallus margin, and all cells of the 2nd-order cell row bear 3rd-order rows. Blade edges 

monostromatic, with radial line composed of an axial cell plus 4 pericentral cells. Plants 

sterile. 

Distribution 

Lord Howe Island, Samoa, southern Marshall Islands, Solomon Islands, Australia. 

Fijian Record 

N'Yeurt et al. 1996b. 


Tua'koi (*TI71 USP S4: 13). 


Found creeping on Acropora coral rubble on outer reef. There appears to exist much 

confusion in the literature between the genera Caloglossa and Hypoglossum, and this calls 

for a re-examination of other records of Caloglossa from deep-water habitats in the South 

Pacific (see Wynne and Kraft 1985). 

Martensia Hering 184 1 : 92 

Martensia elegans Hering 1841: 92 (type locality unknown); Harvey 1847: 73, pl. 43; 

Weber-van Bosse 1923: 386; Kylin 1956: 449; Jaasund 1976: 1 19, fig. 242; Tsuda and Wray 

1977: 109; Lewis 1984: 46; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 66; Millar 1990: 417, fig. 53A, B; 

Millar and Kraft 1993: 47. 

Hemitrema elegans R. Brown 1843. 

Mesotrema elegans J. Agardh 1854: 110. 

(Fig. 131) 

Plants with soft pinkish-red lobes; 15-30 mm high. Periodic intercalary growth producing 

grid-like network, the grids being the edges of bands extended at right angles to the plane of 

the blades, and interconnected by anastomosing filaments from the grid walls. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Micronesia, Australia, Indonesia, Tanzania. 


South 1991: 9; in Herb. Institute of Marine Resources, University of the South Pacific 

(USP 3 13). 




Tidal pool, middle reef.

Rhodomelaceae 

Melanamansia R.E. Norris 1988: 217 

Melanamansia glomerata (C. Agardh) R.E. Norris 1995: 67. 

Amansia glomerata C. Agardh 1822a: 194 (syntype localities: Hawaiian Island; 'Ravak' 

(Lawak), Waigeo I., Molluccas, Indonesia); J. Agardh 1863 (1851-1863): 11 11; Weber-van 

Bosse 1923: 369; Okamura 1931: 117; Lucas 1935: 224; Yamada and Tanaka 1938: 86; 

B@rgesen 1945: 43; Fritsch 1945: 570, fig. 212a, e-i; Kylin 1956: 544, fig. 436B; 

Womersley and Bailey 1970: 336; Jaasund 1976: 131, fig. 267; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 103; 

Magruder and Hunt 1979: 59; Cribb 1983: 106, pl. 31, fig. 1; Lewis 1984: 50; Tseng et al. 

1984: 142, pl. 74, fig. 4; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 511; Heijs 1987: 152; Lewis and Norris 

1987: 22; Silva et al. 1987: 61; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 63; Norris 1988: 211, figs 1-11, 

(in error); Abbott 1989: 230; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 189; Ohba and 

Enomoto 1992: 32; Millar and Kraft 1993: 50; Verheij and Prud'homme van Reine 1993: 

172, pl. 15, fig. 3. 

(Figs 127,128, 185, 197, 198) 

Plants rose red, up to 10 cm high (mainly 4-6 cm) and forming characteristic rosettes 

composed of lanceolate blades up to 35 mm long and 6 mm broad, with in-rolled leaf tip and 

marginal teeth. Central midrib present, becoming narrower and disappearing towards the 

apex.. Central axial cell surrounded by 5 pericentral cells, with the first 2 dorsal pericentral 

cells each developing a smaller pseudo-pericentral cell that lies adjacent to the axial cell. 

Stem of plants thick and cartilaginous, 0.5-0.7 mm broad, denuded below. Leaves ecorticate, 

up to 78 mm thick, composed of 2 layers of elongate cells in V-shaped transverse rows; each 

cell about 33 x 13 mm in surface view. Marginal teeth up to 1.3 mm long and 445 mm broad, 

with 3-7 tetrasporangial stichidia in median portions of blade, spaced at about 150 mm 

intervals. Tetrasporangia up to 80 x 100 mm, formed in curved stichidia up to 340 mm long 

and 250 mm broad terminating endogenous branches (serrations) or developing 

adventitiously from the marginal teeth. Up to 8 tetrasporangia per stichidium. 

Distribution 

Hawaii, Fiji. Other reported distributions have yet to be confirmed. 


Askenasy 1888; Chapman 1971: 170; Kasahara 1985: 67; South 1991: 9; South and 

Kasahara 1992: 65; in Herb. Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 512071, 623676); all as 

Amansia glomerata C. Agardh. 


Hof6a (H222/ USP 346, H223/ USP 347, *H224/ USP S4: 20). 


Very common on the northern Rotuman reefs ('Ahau to Oinafa), where it is often the 

dominant species and forms dense beds among the coral rubble on middle reef sites typically 

not fully exposed at low tide. These beds of Melanamansia offer protection for a number of 

other algae such as Halimeda and smaller species which are partially embedded within the 

dense algal cover. 

Records of Amansia glomerata C. Agardh from South Africa and Mauritius have been 

ascribed to A. rhodantha (Harvey) J. Agardh by Norris (1995: 67), based on anatomical 

characters separating it from Melanamansia, namely the presence of pseudo-pericentral cells 

in the latter genus. Rotuman and Fijian 'Amansia glomerata' specimens have been re- 

examined, and were found to belong to Melanamansia. Melanamansia presently occurs from 

the central to the western Pacific Ocean to Japan, and South Africa's east coast. The genus


Arnansia probably does not extend into the Pacific (R.E. Norris, pers. comm.), and hence a 

re-examination of all reports of this genus in the region is called for. 

Bostrychia Montagne 1842b: 39 

Bostrychia tenella (Lamouroux) J . Agardh 1863 (1851-1863): 869; Okamura 1907: 96, 

pl. 22, figs 1-13; Weber-van Bosse 1923: 363; Taylor 1960: 599; Durairatnam 1961: 69; 

Chapman 1963: 130, fig. 135a, b; Womersley and Bailey 1970: 335; Dawes 1974: 154; 

Jaasund 1976: 127, fig. 258; Woelkerling 1976: 116, fig. 133; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 104; 

Cribb 1983: 106, pl. 66, figs 3, 4; Lewis 1984: 42; Tseng et al. 1984: 144, pl. 75, fig. 3; 

Lewis and Nonis 1987: 22; Silva et al. 1987: 62; King and Puttock 1989: 34; Littler et al. 

1989: 174; Tsuda 1991: 48; Coppejans and Prud'homme van Reine 1992a: 189. 

Fucus tenellus Vahl 1802: 45 (type locality: St. Croix, Virgin Island). 

Plocamium tenellum Lamouroux 18 13: 138 (nomen novum). 

(Figs 129, 186) 

Plants 5-20 mm high, found as rather soft, dense mosslike clumps; 3 times pinnately 

branched with dense bilateral branching near the typically incurved tips. Aggregates almost 

black, individual plants dark red to purple, main axis corticated 105-170 bm in diameter, 

with 6-8 pericentral cells. Secondary branchlets 35-60 bm in diameter, at 170-200 p,m 

intervals along main axis; polysiphonous, corticated below and uncorticated above. Ultimate 

branchlets monosiphonous 12-24 p,m in diameter 10-20 cells long with individual cells 

8-10 pm long. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, New Caledonia, Solomon Islands, northern Australia, Indonesia, China, 

Florida, Caribbean, Brazil, Tanzania. 


Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 201; South and Kasahara 1992: 65; Raj 1993: 49, fig. 14; In 

Herb Bishop Museum, Hawaii (BISH 458108,4581 13). 


Paptea (PI/ USP 444, *P3/ USP S5: 19). 


Found as dense, almost black clumps at the bases of stilt-like roots of mangrove trees 

(Bruguiera gymnorhiza) growing in an inland marine swamp about 300 m inland, intermixed 

with coconut groves. No other algae were found in this habitat, hence it represented an 

isolated population. This species was subsequently found growing on rocks, tree roots and 

other objects close to the low tide mark on most Rotuman shores. 

As Fucus tenellus Vahl, the intended basionym for Bostrychia tenella, is a later homonym 

of F. tenellus Esper (1800: 197, pl. CIX) it is not given priority (see Silva et al. 1987: 62). 

Plocamium tenellum Lamouroux is treated as a nomen novum in accordance with Article 72, 

Note 1, of the ICBN. 

Chondria C. Agardh 18 17: xviii 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Chondria 

1. Thallus creeping .................................................... C. simpliciuscula 

1: Thallus erect ................................................................... .2 

2. Plants dark red, up to 30 mm high, main axis to 1.5 mm in diameter ............ C. dasyphylla 

2: Plants reddish-purple, up to 40 mm high; main axis 400-500 pm in diameter ....... C. sedifolia

Chondria dasyphylla (Woodward) C. Agardh 1817: xviii; Weber-van Bosse 1923: 352; 

Taylor 1960: 616; Durairatnam 1961: 74, pl. 19, figs 10-1 1; Chapman 1963: 145, fig. 150; 

Jaasund 1976: 135, fig. 274; pl. 9; Dawes 1974: 155; Ngan and Price 1979: 16; Gordon-Mills 

1987: 246, figs 30-57; Lewis and Norris 1987: 22; Santelices and Abbott 1987: 9; Silva et 

al. 1987: 63; Garrigue and Tsuda 1988: 64; Tsuda 1991: 50; Verheij and Prud'homme van 

Reine 1993: 172. 

Fucus dasyphyllus Woodward 1794: 239, pl. 23, figs 1-3 (syntype localities: Cromer and 

Yarmouth, Norfolk, England). 

(Figs 134, 188a, b) 

Plants dark red, up to 30 mm high, with sparse and broadly pyramidal branching. Main 

axis 1-1.5 mm in diameter; branchlets single or clustered, constricted at the base and retuse 

at the apex, with central apiculus bearing a tuft of trichoblasts. Axial cell surrounded by 5 

pericentral cells, each 88-120 pm in diameter. Cortex composed of 3 layers, the outermost 

of small oblong cells up to 12 Fm in diameter; cortical cells angular in surface view. Plants 

sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, New Caledonia, Easter Island, northern Australia, Indonesia, Taiwan, Ryukyu Island, 

Philippines, Jamaica, tropical Americas, Caribbean, Ceylon, Tanzania, Europe. 




Kelega; Lopta; Tua'koi (TI41 USP 475). 


Found attached to coral rubble in tide pools, middle reef. In view of the need for a 

revision of the non-European records of Chondria dasyphylla (see Gordon-Mills 1987), the 

Rotuman plants cannot be firmly ascertained to belong to that species, although in vegetative 

characters they agree with the descriptions given by Taylor (1960) and Gordon-Mills (1987). 

Chondria sedifolia Harvey 1853: 19, pl. XVIII: G (type locality: Key West, Florida, 

USA); Taylor 1928: 171, pl. 34, fig. 11; 1960: 615; Chapman 1963: 145, fig. 149; Dawes 

1974: 155; Jaasund 1976: 135, fig. 273a, b; pl. 9; Silva et al. 1987: 63. 

(Figs 189, 191a, b) 

Plants dull reddish-purple, up to 40 mm high forming compact entangled mats, coarse and 

firm to the touch. Main axis percurrent, 400-600 pm in diameter. Branching broadly 

pyramidal; branchlets 400-500 bm in diameter, erect-spreading and constricted at the base, 

club-shaped with truncated distal ends bearing a tuft of trichoblasts. Axial cell spherical, 

25-28 p,m in diameter and surrounded by 5 pericentral cells 62-68 pm in diameter. Medulla 

composed of loosely-packed ovoid cells 40-45 pm in diameter. Cortex 2-layered; the 

lowermost of obovoid cells 12-15 Fm in diameter, the uppermost of subrectangular cells up 

to 3 pm in diameter. Cortical cells rounded and loosely-packed in surface view. 

Tetrasporangia cruciate, dark red, 75-100 pm in diameter, clustered near the apices of fertile 

branchlets. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Philippines, Caribbean, north America, Tanzania.


Fijian Record 



Lopta (L37lUSP 476). 


Found as compact, entangled mats on the outer reef flat and reef rim, highly exposed to 

wave action and closely associated with Turbinaria ornata, Hypnea sp., and Chnoospora 

minima. Rotuman plants are noticeably shorter and thinner than Harvey's original decription 

for this species. The difference may be due to the high degree of exposure the Rotuman 

plants are faced with. 

Chondria simpliciuscula Weber-van Bosse 1913: 125, pl. 12, figs 9-10 (type locality 

unknown); Tsuda and Wray 1977: 105; Price and Scott 1992: 169, fig. 59A-E. 

(Figs 130, 133, 190a, b) 

Plants reddish-brown, up to 3 mm high and 135-188 pm in diameter. Thallus terete and 

creeping, up to 17 mm long and attached to the substratum via groups of rhizoids projecting 

from the ventral surface of prostrate axis. Single, erect lateral fertile branchlets broadened 

apically, most bearing tetrasporangia 47-82 pm in diameter. Apical cell in a shallow pit, up 

to 7 p,m high, undergoing transverse division below and surrounded by a small tuft of 

trichoblasts forming a characteristic apical crown up to 30 pm high. Cortical cells of main 

axes polygonal to isodiametric near the apices, elongate longitudinally and polygonal to 

ellipsoidal in mature sections, 6-8 p,m in diameter and 8-15 p,m long. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Australia, Indonesia. 

Fijian Record 



Hapmafau ("HAP151 USP S5: 15). 


Found within Valonia aegagropila algal mat on exposed beach rock; back reef. 

Herposiphonia Nageli 1846: 238 

Herposiphonia secunda (C. Agardh) Ambronn f. tenella (C. Agardh) Wynne 1985a: 173; 

Trono 1969: 85; Lewis 1984: 55; Payri and Meinesz 1985a: 512; Silva et al. 1987: 64; Price 

and Scott 1992: 175, fig. 62A-D; Millar and Kraft 1993: 53; Verheij and Prud'homme van 

Reine 1993: 173; Wynne 1993: 16. 

Hutchinsia tenella C. Agardh 1828: 105 (type locality: Sicily sensu Silva et al. 1987: 64). 

Herposiphonia tenella (C. Agardh) Ambronn 1880: 197; Okamura 1930(1929-1932): 23, 

pl. 264, figs 1-9; Taylor 1950: 147; 1960: 604, pl. 72, fig. 12; Dawson 1954: 452, fig. 59a; 

1956: 29; 1957: 124; Durairatnam 1961: 71, pl. 28, figs 4-6; Chapman 1963: 127, fig. 133 

(as H. tenella (C. Agardh) Naegeli); Hollenberg 1968c: 555, fig. 14; Dawes 1974: 158; 

Jaasund 1976: 129, fig. 261; Woelkerling 1976: 130, figs 241-244; Tsuda and Wray 1977: 

107; Cribb 1983: 112, pl. 68, fig. 1 (f. secunda); Santelices and Abbott 1987: 9; Abbott 

1989: 230; South and Yen 1992: 129.

Herposiphoniaparca Setchell (sensu Tsuda 1991: 54, Price and Scott 1992: 177). 

(Figs 200, 206) 

Plants purplish-red, with main prostrate axis to 120 pm in diameter, and up to 12 

pericentral cells. Lateral indeterminate branches arising from every 4th segment, with 

determinate erect branchlets arising in alternate, contiguous series of 3 from the branch 

primordia. Erect branches 250-560 pm long, composed of 5-9 segments and possessing 4-5 

apical trichoblasts up to 15 pm in diameter and 260 pm long. Rhizoidal holdfasts at every 

node of the prostrate axis, to 36 pm long and 47 pm in diameter, being terminated by a 

concave disc-like adhering structure up to 11 8 pm in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Micronesia, Nauru, Tahiti, Hawaii, Easter Island, northern Australia, Vietnam, 

Ceylon, Florida, Maldives, Tanzania. 


Garbary et al. 1991: 255; South 1991: 9; South and Kasahara 1992: 65. 




Epiphytic on Dictyota friabilis in sheltered tide pools; also occurs amongst Valonia 

aegagropila mats on exposed beach rocks (e.g. at Hapmafau). 

Luurenciu Lamouroux 18 13: 42 

Key to the Rotuman Species of Laurencia 

1. Plants erect ...................................................... L. venusta 

1: Plantsrepent ........................................................ L.sp. 

Luurencia venusta Yamada 1931b: 203, fig. H, pl. 6, fig. A (syntype localities: Koshikijima 

(Kagoshima Prefecture) and Goto (Nagasaki Prefecture), Japan); Saito 1967: 14, pls V 

and VI; text figs 8-14; Jaasund 1970a: 62, fig. 1B; 1976: 141, fig. 284; Cribb 1983: 126, 

pl. 36, fig. 3; Lewis 1984: 61; Lewis and Norris 1987: 23; Silva et al. 1987: 68; Millar and 

Kraft 1993: 55. 

(Figs 132, 135, 187) 

Fronds purplish-red, erect, up to 6 cm high; cartilaginous, somewhat rigid. Older fronds 

naked below and often encrusted with coralline algae; above cylindrical with percurrent main 

axes up to 1 mm in diameter beset with alternate, opposite or verticillate branchlets up to 900 

pm in diameter. Ultimate branchlets constricted at the base, terminated by a tuft of 

trichoblasts in sunken apex. Cortical cells 20-30 pm in diameter, subspherical to obovoid in 

surface view, with lateral pit-connections. Medullary cells up to 88 pm in diameter, with 

abundant lenticular thickenings of the medullary cell walls, a diagnostic feature of this 

species. Plants sterile. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Australia, Philippines, Taiwan, Japan, southwest Africa. 

Fijian Record 




Lopta (L351 USP 477, *L50/ USP S7: 13). 


Forming dense, compact mats on the outer reef crest in association with Gelidiella 

acerosa and Chondria sedifolia. Exposed to considerable wave action. 

Laurencia sp. 

(Figs 193, 194,201,202) 

Plants to 5 cm long and 3 mm in diameter, repent and dorso-ventrally flattened. Colour 

dark red to purplish. Side branchlets opposite, up to 3 mm long and terminating in a tuft of 

sunken apical trichoblasts. In cross-section, composed of ovoid medullary cells up to 65 ym 

in diameter, a cortical layer of inner cells up to 18 pm in diameter, and an outer layer of 

subquadrate cells 5-3 ym in diameter. Cortical cells projecting at apex; lenticular thickenings 

absent. Secondary pit-connections between outer cortical cells absent. Plants sterile. 




Mixed with Sargassum polycystum and Coelothrix irregularis within seagrass beds. This 

alga was examined by Professor I. A. Abbott at the University of Hawaii, but no match with 

any existing species could be obtained. Its status is currently under further investigation. 

Polysiphonia Greville 1824: 308 

Polysiphonia scopulorum Harvey 1855: 540 (type locality: Rottnest Island, Western 

Australia); Womersley and Bailey 1970: 330 (as var. villum (Harvey) Hollenberg); Tsuda 

and Wray 1977: 110; Cribb 1983: 132, pl. 70, figs 1-2; Lewis 1984: 55 (as P. scopularum); 

Payri and Meinesz 1985~: 514; Millar 1990: 445, figs 65E-G; Price and Scott 1992: 210, fig. 

77A-D; Millar and Kraft 1993: 58. 

var. scopubmm (Harvey) Hollenberg 1968a: 79, fig. 6F; Trono 1969: 83; Abbott 1989: 23 1. 

(Fig. 207a-d) 

Plants purplish-red, up to 5 mm high with cells mostly shorter than broad, the prostrate 

branches 58-65 ym in diameter with 4 pericentral cells each about 58 X 29 pm around a 

central axial cell about 76 X 12 pm. Erect branches up to 115 ym long and 60 ym broad, 

arising mostly at 2 or 3 segment intervals along the prostrate branches. The segments of the 

median parts of the erect branches mostly shorter than broad; the apical region of the 

branches bearing trichoblasts at intervals of 20r 3 segments from the tip of the branch, scar- 

cells present on lower parts. Trichoblasts up to 50 pm long and 9 ym in diameter, often 

forming lateral whorls; rhizoids up to 35 ym long and 60 pm broad, in open connection with 

the pericentral cells and terminated by an inflated portion up to 117 pm in diameter. 

Distribution 

Fiji, Caroline Islands, Hawaii. 


Kapraun and Bowden 1978: 201 (as P. scopularum), figs 23, 24; South 1992: 9; South 

and Kasahara 1992: 67.




Epiphytic on Valonia aegagropila and Dictyota friabilis in sheltered back reef locations. 

Phytobiogeographical Analysis of the Rotuman Algal Flora 

Comparison of Sites on the Island 

These data are graphically presented in figs 209-210. The total flora to date consists of 88 

taxa. The Rhodophyta comprise the majority of the flora (46.6%; 41 taxa), with the 

Phaeophyta being least represented (12.5%; 11 taxa). Chlorophyta consist of 40.9% of the 

flora, or 36 taxa. Owing to the uncertain taxonomy of the majority of the Cyanophyceae, 

they are excluded from the analysis, although they are widespread at most stations. 

Comparison of stations reveals marked differences in the occurence of red algae, although 

the green algae have a more constant distribution. There is also a marked north-south 

distribution pattern of certain species of Chlorophyta, especially Halimeda and Caulerpa 

(Fig. 21 1). The latter trend may reflect differences in the habitats of opposite coasts on the 

island, as discussed below. 

Discussion 

North-South Distribution Patterns 

As can be seen from Fig. 21 1, there is marked difference in north-south distribution of 

Rotuman algae, especially with respect to the genera Halimeda, Avrainvillea, Rhipilia, 

Melanamansia and Caulerpa. This could be attributed in part to the different habitats on 

opposite sides of the island, which are predominantly sandy and sheltered to the north 

(favouring Halimeda and Melanamansia growth) and relatively rocky and exposed to the 

south (favouring more cryptic, robust species). 

The Caulerpa distribution is, however, the opposite, with sites on the north coast (e.g. 

Lopta) being rich in clumps of relatively resistant Caulerpa racemosa var, uvifera, whereas 

the sandy and protected area of Hapmafau Bay at the Motusa Isthmus favours growth of 

larger and less robust Caulerpa species (Caulerpa racemosa var. peltata, Caulerpa 

cupressoides, Caulerpa serrulata). It should be stressed that Hapmafau Bay is not a typical 

southern station, most of which support robust forms of Caulerpa serrulata (e.g. at Tuakoi, 

Savlei). 

A possible explanation for these distribution patterns could be the orientation of the 

island, which lies approximately in an east-west line. The southern coast is therefore more 

exposed to the south-east trade winds predominant most of the year in this part of the Pacific, 

resulting in significantly more wave-washed and eroded habitats. The northern coast, on the 

other hand, is-relatively protected and this has allowed the accumulation of sandy deposits 

and the formation of small lagoons and tidal pools, favouring growth of such species as 

Halimeda, Avrainvillea, Rhipilia and Melanamansia. 

Rotuma in the Context of Other South Pacific Islands 

Probably the most distinctive feature about Rotuma is its isolation, as it is not 

geographically connected to any other island or island group. In this aspect, it resembles 

Lord Howe Island or Easter Island, both high volcanic islands. In size, it is much smaller 

than its nearest neighbouring islands in Fiji, and its combination of equatorial climate and 

extremely fertile volcanic soil makes it a far more productive island than most of the 

predominantly coral atolls to the north such as Tuvalu and Kiribati. 

The small size of the island, coupled with its mostly exposed fringing reef structure, 

severely limits the types of algal habitats found there. There are thus marked floristic 

differences to be expected when comparing the island with such locations as the Solomons, 

Samoa, New Caledonia or Fiji, all of which have wide ranges of algal habitats. In particular,


coastal mangroves, estuarine areas and extensive lagoonal habitats are absent on Rotuma. In 

this respect, Rotuman algal habitats would be most comparable to small atolls such as Nauru 

or Kiribati. 

If we consider the prevailing ocean currents in the south-western Pacific region (Ash 

1992), the upstream location of Rotuma from the main Fiji group (Fig. 212) may explain the 

floristic differences between the two localities, as algal species would more favourably be 

dispersed from northerly donor areas (e.g. Micronesia) to Rotuma, while dispersal from Fiji 

to Rotuma is unlikely. It is pertinent to note that many species of algae so far not reported 

from Fiji (e.g.Chnoospora minima, Chondria simpliciuscula, Coelarthrum boergesenii, 

Halimeda micronesica and Rhizoclonium africanum) do occur in Rotuma and localities north 

or east of it. 

Conclusions 

The present study has shed some light on aspects of the Rotuman algal flora, which was 

totally unknown previously. While the first algal checklist for the benthic intertidal flora of 

that island has been produced, it revealed an apparent impoverishment of the Rotuman algal 

flora with respect to neighbouring island groups such as Fiji (314 spp.; South and Kasahara 

1992) Micronesia (520 spp.; Tsuda and Wray 1977) and the Solomon Islands (219 spp.; 

Womersley and Bailey 1970). However, the severe limitations imposed by the absence of 

subtidal collections should be taken into consideration before making unrealistic conclusions 

about the richness of the algal flora on Rotuma. Nevertheless, the intrinsic limitations of the 

Rotuman algal habitats (which occupy mostly fringing, exposed reefs) dictate that the algal 

diversity found on the island should be proportionally less, with respect to much larger island 

groups such as Fiji. 

While many new records to the Fijian flora were derived from this research, it also 

revealed that the Rotuman algal flora should be actually considered quite distinct and 

separate, based on physical, compositional, and biogeographic evidence. Indeed, while the 

island of Rotuma stands as a totally separate volcanic structure separated from the Fiji group 

by age and geology, its flora is likewise separated by the action of the prevailing ocean 

currents. 

Still a lot is unknown about the Rotuman algal flora, especially its subtidal composition. 

While this preliminary research opened the way to understanding the algal communities 

found on intertidal Rotuman shores, further work, especially diving expeditions by SCUBA 

around the island's reefs, would be highly beneficial and reveal probably yet unknown 

aspects of the flora and possibly other new species, thereby contributing to a greater 

understanding of the phytobiogeography of the region. Also, there is a need to compare 

critical Rotuman species with type specimens, and collections from elsewhere in the region. 

Acknowledgments 

The author gratefully acknowledges financial support from the University of the South 

Pacific (URC grant # 0713-9106) and from the International Centre for Ocean Development 

(ICOD; Canada). I sincerely thank Dr D. W. Keats for examining specimens of Lithophyllum 

and Peyssonnelia, and Dr G. T. Kraft for his encouragement, comments and revision of the 

draft of this manuscript. I also wish to thank my supervisor, Professor G. Robin South, for 

unfailing support, interest and encouragement throughout my research, and the staff of the 

Marine Studies Programme and Energy Supply Unit for technical assistance. I thank the staff 

at the Botany Department, University of Hawaii for making research facilities available 

during my visit there, especially Dr I. A. Abbott for her kind assistance and critical 

comments. The author is also grateful to the botany staff at the Bernice P. Bishop Museum in 

Honolulu, especially Mr Jack Fisher who endeavoured to make herbarium specimens 

available for examination. I also thank Dr W. H. Magruder for examining specimens of 

Ceramium, Hypnea, Laurencia and Coelothrix. Special thanks go to fellow amateur-radio 

operators Raj Singh and Dale Meyers, who consistently provided communication links 

between Suva and Rotuma, easing the difficulties of isolation. I wish to thank my mother, 

Jacqueline, for her loving support and understanding during my long field trips. Last but not


least, heartfelt gratitude is expressed towards the kind people of Rotuma, especially the 

Aisake, Penjueli and Fonmoa families, without whose cooperation and support this study 

would not have been possible. 

References 

Abbott, I. A. (1945). The genus Liagora (Rhodophyceae) in Hawaii. Occasional Papers of the Bernice 

P. Bishop Museum 18(10), 145-169. 

Abbott, I. A. (1989). Marine algae of the north-west Hawaiian Islands. Pac@c Science 43(3), 223-233. 

Abbott, I. A., Junfu, Z., and Bangmei, X. (1991). Gracilaria mixta, sp. nov., and other western Pacific 

species of the genus (Rhodophyta: Gracilariaceae). Pacifc Science 45(1), 12-27. 

Abbott, I. A., and Santelices, B. (1985). The Marine Algae of Easter Island (eastern Polynesia). 

Proceedings of the Fifh International Coral Reef Congress, Tahiti 5,71-75. 

Adanson, M. (1763). 'Familles des Plantes.' Vol. 2. (Vincent: Paris.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1817). 'Synopsis Algarum Scandinaviae, Adjecta Dispositione Universali Algarum.' 

(Berlingian: Lund.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1820). 'Species Algarum'. Vol. 1. (Berlingian: Lund.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1822). 'Species Algarum'. Vol. 1. (Berlingian: Lund.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1823). 'Species Algarum Rite Cognitae Cum Synonymis, Differentis Specifis et 

Descriptionibus Succintis.' (Berlingian: Lund.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1824). 'Systema Algarum.' (Berlingian: Lund.) 

Agardh, C. A. (1828). 'Species Algarum'. Vol. 2. (Greifswald.) 

Agardh, J. G. (1837). Novae species algarum, quas in itinere ad oras maris rubri collegit Eduardus 

Riippell, cum observationibus nonnullis in species rariores antea cognitas. Museum 

Senckenbergianum, Abhandlungen aus dem Gebiete der Beschreibenden Naturgeschichte 2, 

169-174. 

Agardh, J. G. (1847). Nya alger fran Mexico. dfversigt af Kongelige (Svenska) Vetenskaps Akademiens 

Forhandlingar 4,5-17. 

Agardh, J. G. (1848). 'Species Genera et Ordines Algarum. Volumen Primum: Algas Fucoideas 

Complectens.' (Gleerup: Lund.) 

Agardh, J. G. (1851-1863). 'Species genera et ordines algarum. Volumen secundum: algas florideas 

complectens.' (Gleerup: Lund.) 

Agardh, J. G. (1872). Bidrag till Fiorideernes systematik. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift, Afdelningen For 

Mathematik och Naturvetenskap, 8(6), 1-60. 

Agardh, J. G. (1873). Till algernes systematik. I. Caulerpa. 11. Zonaria. 111. Sargassum. Lunds 

Universitets ifrsskrift, Afdelningen F6r Mathematik och Naturvetenskap 9(8), 1-71. 

Agardh, J. G. (1882). Till algernes systematik, Nya bidrag (Tredje afdelningen). Lunds Universitets 

Arsskrift, Afdelningen For Mathematik och Naturvetenskap 17(4), 1-136. 

Agardh, J. G. (1883). Till algernes systematik, Nya bidrag (Tredje afdelningen). Lunds Universitets 

Arsskrift, Afdelningen For Mathematik och Naturvetenskap 19(2), 1-182. 

Agardh, J. G. (1887). Till algernes systematik. VIII. Siphoneae. Acta Universitets Lund 23, Afd. 3(2), 

1-174. 

Agardh, J. G. (1894). Analecta algologica, Continuatio I. Lunds Universitets ifrsskrift, Andra 

Afdelningen, Kongliga Fysiografiska Sallskapets Handlingar 29(9), 1-144. 

Ajisaka, T., and Enomoto, S. (1985). Dictyota Lamouroux (Dictyotales, Phaeophyceae) of the Fiji and 

Solomon Islands. Kagoshiina University Research Center South Pacific Occasional Papers 5, 

35-4 1. 

Allender, B. M., and Kraft, G. T. (1983). The marine algae of Lord Howe Island (New South Wales): 

the Dictyotales and Cutleriales (Phaeophyta). Brunonia 6, 73-130. 

Ambronn, H. (1880). Ueber einige Falle von Bilateralitat bei den Florideen. Botanische Zeitung 38, 

161-174, 177-1 85,193-200,209-216,225-233. 

Areschoug, J. E. (1850). Phycearum, quae in maribus Scandinaviae crescunt, enumeratio: Sectio 

posterior Ulvaceas continuens. Nova Acta Regiae Societatis Scientiarum Upsaliensis 14,385-454. 

Askenasy, E. (1888). Algen. In 'Foschnungsreise S. M. S. 'Gazelle', IV Theil: Botanik'. (fascicle 2), 58 

p. (Berlin.) 

Ash, J. (1992). Vegetation ecology of Fiji: past, present, and future perspectives. Pacific Science 46(2), 

11 1-127. 

Baoren, L., and Tseng, C. K. (1984). Phaeophyta. In 'Common Seaweeds of China'. (Ed. C. K. Tseng.) 

pp.167-247. (Science Press: Beijing.) - 

Barton, E. S. (1891). A Systematic and Structural Account of the genus Turbinaria, Lamx. Transactions 

of the Linnaean Society of London, Botany 3,215-226.


Barton, E. S. (1901). The genus Halimeda. Monographs of the Siboga Expedition 60,32 pp. 

Bartram, E. B. (1943). Pacific outpost mosses. The Bryologist 48, 12-22. 

Beanland, W. R., and Woelkerling, W. J. (1982). Studies on Australian mangrove algae: 11. 

Composition and geographic distribution of communities in Spencer Gulf, South Australia. 

Proceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria 94, 86-106. 

Bennett, G. (1832). Notices on the native plants of the island of Rotuma, southern Pacific Ocean. 

Magazine of Natural History 5,92-97. 

Bliding, C. (1955). Enteromorpha intemzedia-a new species from the coasts of Sweden, England, and 

Wales. Botaniska Notiser 108,253-262. 

Bliding, C. (1963). A critical survey of European taxa in Ulvales. Part I. Capsosiphon, Percursaria, 

Blidingia, Enteromorpha. Opera Botanica 8(3), 1-160. 

Booth, W. E., Solly, R. K., and Wright, C. P. (1983). Preliminary attempts to culture Eucheuma 

striatum Schmitz (Rhodophyta) in Fiji waters. Fiji Agricultural Journal 45(2), 55-63. 

Borgesen, F. (1905). Contributions 8 la connaissance du genre Siphonocladus Schmitz. Oversiigt over 

det Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Forhandlinger 1905,259-291. 

Borgesen, F. (1907). An ecological and systematic account of the caulerpas of the Danish West Indies. 

Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskabs Skrifter Naturvidenskabelig og Mathematisk Afdeling 

4(5), 337-392. 

Borgesen, F. (1910). Some new or little known West Indian Florideae, 11. Botanisk Tidsskrift 30, 

177-207. 

Borgesen, F. (1911). Some Chlorophyceae from the Danish West Indies. Botanisk Tidsskrift 31, 

127-152. 

Borgesen, F. (1913). The marine algae of the Danish West Indies, Part 1: Chlorophyceae. Dansk 

Botanisk Arkiv 1(4), 1-160. 

Borgesen, F. (1914). The Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, Part 2: Phaeophyceae. Dansk 

Botanisk Arkiv 2(2), 157-226. 

B@rgesen, F. (1915). The Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, Part 3: Rhodophyceae (1). Dansk 

Botanisk Arkiv 3, 1-80. 

Borgesen, F. (1919). The Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, Part 3: Rhodophyceae (5). Dansk 

Botanisk Arkiv 3,305-368. 

Borgesen, F. (1920). The Marine Algae of the Danish West Indies, Part 3: Rhodophyceae (6), with 

Addenda to the Chlorophyceae, Phaeophyceae, and Rhodophyceae. Dansk Botanisk Arkiv 3, 

369-498. 

Borgesen, F. (1924). The Marine Algae from the Easter Islands. In 'The Natural History of Juan 

Fernandez and Easter Islands'. (Ed. C. Skottsberg.) pp. 247-309. (Almqvist and Wiksells: Uppsala.) 

BGrgesen, F. (1925-1930). Marine Algae from the Canary Islands. Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes 

Selskab, Biologiske Meddelelser 5(3), 1-123; 6(2), 112; 6(6), 1-97; 8(1), 1-97; 9(1), 1-159. 

Borgesen, F. (1932). A Revision of Forsskil's Algae Mentioned in Flora Aegyptiaco-Arabica and found 

in his Herbarium in the Botanical Museum of the University of Copenhagen. Dansk Botanisk Arkiv 

8(2), 1-14. 

Borgesen, F. (1934). Some Marine Algae from the northern Part of the Arabian Sea with Remarks on 

Their Geographical Distribution. Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Biologiske 

Meddelelser 11(6), 1-72. 

Borgesen, F. (1935). A list of marine algae from Bombay. Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, 

Biologiske Meddelelser 12(2), 1-64. 

Borgesen, F. (1940). Some Marine Algae from Mauritius, I: Chlorophyceae. Kongelige Danske 

Videnskabernes Selskab, Biologiske Meddelelser 15(4), 1-81. 

Borgesen, F. (1941). Some Marine Algae from Mauritius, 11: Phaeophyceae. Kongelige Danske 

Videnskabernes Selskab, Biologiske Meddelelser 16(3), 1-8 1. 

Borgesen, F. (1944). Some marine algae from Mauritius. 111. Rhodophyceae. Part 3. Rhodymeniales. 

Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Biologiske Meddelelser 19(6), 1-32. 

Borgesen, F. (1945). Some Marine Algae from Mauritius, 111: Rhodophyceae, Part 4: Ceramiales. 


Borgesen, F. (1946). Some Marine Algae from Mauritius, An additional List of Species to Part I: 

Chlorophyceae. Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskab, Biologiske Meddelelser 20(6), 1-64. 

Borgesen, F. (1951). Some marine algae from Mauritius. Additions to the parts previously published. 

111. Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes Selskub, Biologiske Meddelelser 18(16), 1-44. 

Bprrgesen, F. (1953). Some marine algae from Mauritius. Additions to the parts previously published. V. 


Bory de Saint-Vincent, J. B. G. M. (1823). C6ramiaires. Dictionnaire Classique d'Histoire Naturelle 3, 

339-341.

Bory de Saint-Vincent, J. B. G. M. (1827). Padine. Dictionnaire Classique d'Histoire Naturelle 12, 

589-591. 

Brostoff, W. N. (1989). Avraiizvillea amldelpha (Codiales, Chlorophyta) from Oahu, Hawai'i. Pacific 

Science. 43(2), 166-169. 

Brown, R. (1843). Supplement 111. Algae. In 'Mantissa Botanica Altera. Sistens Genera Plantarum'. 

(Ed. S. L. Endlichner.) pp. 1-56. (Fr. Beck: Vienna.) 

Chamberlain, Y. M. (1977). Observations on Fosliella farinosa (Lamour.) Howe (Rhodophyta, 

Corallinaceae) in the British Isles. British Phycological Journal 12,343-358. 

Chamberlain, Y. M. (1983). Studies in the Corallinaceae, with special reference to Fosliella and 

Pneophylluiiz in the British Isles. Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History), Botany 1, 

291463. 

Chapman, V. J. (1937). A Revision of tthe Marine Algae of Norfolk. Journal of the Linnean Society of 

London, Botany 51, 205-263. 

Chapman, V. J. (1955). Algal Collections from Funafuti Atoll. Pacific Science 9(3), 354-356. 

Chapman, V. J. (1961). The Marine Algae of Jamaica. Part I. Myxophyceae and Chlorophyceae. 

Bulletin of the Institute of Jainaica Scierzce Series 12(1), 1-159. 

Chapman, V. J. (1963). The Marine Algae of Jamaica. Part 11. Phaeophyceae and Rhodophyceae. 

Bulletin of the Institute of Janzaica Science Series 12(2), 1-201. 

Chapman, V. J. (1971). The marine algae of Fiji. Revue Algologique 2, 164-171. 

Chapman, V. J. (1977). Marine algae of Norfolk Island and the Cook Islands. Botanica Marina 20, 

161-165. 

Chiang, Y.-M., and Chen, C. (1982). The genus Liagora of Taiwan. Acta Oceanographica Taiwanica 

13, 181-196. 

Chou, R. C.-Y. (1945). Pacific species of Galaxaura I. Asexual types. Papers from the Michigan 

Acadeiny of Science, Arts and Letters 30(1944), 35-56. 

Chou, H.-N., and Chiang, Y.-M. (1981). The Sargassuriz of Taiwan. Acta Oceanographica Taiwarzica 

12, 132-149. 

Coppejans, E. (1992). Marine algae of Papua New Guinea (Madang Prov.). 2. A revised and completed 

list of Caulerpa (Chlorophyta-Caulerpales). Blurizea 36, 383410. 

Coppejans, E., and Beeckman, T. (1989). Ca~derpa section Sedoideae (Chlorophyta, Caulerpales) from 

the Kenyan coast. Nova Hedwigia 49(34), 381-393. 

Coppejans, E., and Beeckman, T. (1990). Caulerpa (Chlorophyta, Caulerpales) from the Kenyan coast. 

Nova Hedwigia 50(1-2), 11 1-125. 

Coppejans, E., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1989). Seaweeds of the Snellius-I1 Expedition. 

Chlorophyta:Caulerpales (Except Caulerpa and Halirizeda). Blumea 34, 119-142. 

Coppejans, E., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1990). A note on Rhipilia nigrescens Coppejans & 

Prud'homme van Reine (Chlorophyta). Blurizea 35, 261-262. 

Coppejans, E., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1992~). The oceanographic Snellius-I1 expedition. 

Botanical results. List of stations and collected plants. Bulletin des S6ances de I'Acadeiizie Royale 

des Sciences Outre-Mer 37, 153-1 94. 

Coppejans, E., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1992b). Seaweeds of the Snellius-I1 Expedition (E. 

Indonesia): the genus Caulerpa (Chlorophyta-Caulerpales). Bulletin des Stfarices de I' Acadeiizie 

Royale Sciences Outre-Mer 37. 667-712. 

Cribb, A. B. (1983). 'Marine Algae of the Southern Great Barrier Reef. Part 1. Rhodophyta.' 

(Australian Coral Reef Society: Brisbane.) 

Crouan, P. L. (1858). Aizizales de la Societe Nationale de Botanie, 4e Serie, 9. 

Davis, W. M. (1920). The islands and coral reefs of Fiji. Geological Journal 55, 34-45, 200-220, 

377-388. 

Dawes, C. J. (1974). 'Marine Algae of the West Coast of Florida.' (University of Miami Press: Miami.) 

Dawson, E. Y. (1941). A review of the genus Rhodynzenia with descriptions of new species. Allan 

Hancock Pacific Expeditions 3(7,8), 115-181. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1950). A review of Ceranziurn along the Pacific coast of North America with special 

reference to its Mexican representatives. Farlowia 4(1), 113-138. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1953). Marine Red Algae of Pacific Mexico. Part I. Bangiales to Corallinaceae Subf. 

Corallinoideae. Allan Harzcock Pacific Expeditions 17(1), 1-239. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1954). Marine plants in the vicinity of the Irzstitut Ockanographique de Nha Trang, Vidt 

Nanz. Pacific Scierzce 8(4), 373471. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1956). Some marine algae of the southern Marshall Islands. Pacific Science 10,25-66. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1957). An annotated List of Marine Algae from Eniwetok Atoll, Marshall Islands. 

Pacific Science 11, 92-1 32.


Dawson, E. Y. (1959). Some marine algae from Canton Atoll. Atoll Research Bulletin 65, 1-6. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1960). New records of marine algae from Pacific Mexico and Central America. Pac@c 

Naturalist 1(19), 3 1-52. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1962). Marine Red Agae of Pacific Mexico. Part 7. Ceramiales: Ceramiaceae, 

Delesseriaceae. Allan Hancock Pacific Expeditions 26(1), 1-208. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1963~). Marine Red Algae of Pacific Mexico. Part 6. Rhodymeniales. Nova Hedwigia 

5(3,4), 437476. 

Dawson, E. Y. (1963b). Marine Red Algae of Pacific Mexico. Part 8. Ceramiales: Dasyaceae, 

Rhodomelaceae. Nova Hedwigia 6(3,4), 401481. 

Decaisne, M. J. (1841). Plantes de 1'Arabie heureuse. Archives du Musium 2,89-199. 

Decaisne, M. J. (1842). Mdmoires sur les corallines ou polypiers calcifkres. Annales des Sciences 

Naturelles, Botanique, series 2,17,297-380; 18,96-128. 

Denizot, M. (1968). 'Les Algues Floridees Encroutantes (i 1'Exclusion des Corallinacdes).' (Laboratoire 

de Cryptogamie, Musdum National d'Histoire Naturelle: Paris.) 

De Toni, J. B. (1895). Phyceae japonicae novae addita enumeratione algarum in ditione maritima 

Japoniae hucusque collectarum. Mernorie del Reale Istituto Veizeto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti 25 (5), 

1-78. 

Di'az-Piferrer, M. (1969). Caulerpa hunznzii, a New Species of Marine Algae (Chlorophyta, Caulelpales) 

from Venezuela. Phycologia 7, 12-17. 

Dickie, G. (1874). Notes on algae from the island of Mangaia, South Pacific. Journal of the Linnean 

Society of London, Botany 15, 30-33. 

Dickie, G. (1876~). Contributions to the Botany of the Expedition of H.M.S. 'Challenger': Algae, 

Chiefly Polynesian. Journal of the Linnean Society of London, Botany 15,235-246. 

Dickie, G. (1876b). Notes on Algae collected by H.N. Moseley, M.A., of H.M.S. 'Challenger', chiefly 

obtained in Torres Straits, Coasts of Japan, and Juan Fernandez. Journal of the Linnean Society of 

London, Botany 15,446-455. 

Dillwyn, L. W. (1802-1809). 'British Confervae.' (London.) 

Dixon, P. S., and Irvine, L. M. (1977). 'Seaweeds of the British Isles. Vol. 1. Rhodophyta. Part 1. 

Introduction, Nemaliales, Gigartinales.' (British Museum (Natural History): London.) 

Dong, M., and Tseng, C. K. (1984). Chlorophyta. In 'Common Seaweeds of China'. (Ed. C. K. Tseng.) 

pp. 249-300. (Science Press: Beijing.) 

Drury, R. A. B., Wallington, E. A., and Cameron, R. (1967). 'Carleton's Histological Technique.' 

(Oxford University Press: New York.) 

Ducker, S. C. (1967). The genus Chlorodesmis (Chlorophyta) in the Indo-Pacific Region. Nova 

Hedwigia 13,145-182. 

Ducker, S. C. (1969). Additions to the genus Chlorodesrnis (Chlorophyta). Phycologia 8(1), 17-20. 

Dunlap, R. C., and Singh, B. B. (1980). 'A National Parks and Reserves System for Fiji. A report to the 

National Trust of Fiji.' (National Trust of Fiji: Suva.) 

Durairatnam, M. (1961). Contribution to the study of the marine algae of Ceylon. Fisheries Research 

Station Bulletin 10, 1-181. 

Egerod, L. E. (1952). An analysis of the siphonous Chlorophycophyta with special reference to the 

Siphonocladales, Siphonales and Dasycladales of Hawaii. University of California Publications in 

Botany 25(5), 325454. 

Ellis, J., and Solander, D. (1786). 'The Natural History of Many Curious and Uncommon Zoophytes, 

Collected from Various Parts of the Globe by the Late John Ellsland. Systematically Arranged and 

Described by the Late Daniel Solander.' (London.) 

Endlicher, S. L. (1843). 'Mantissa Botanica Altera: Sistens Generum Plantarum Supplementum 

Tertium.' (Vindobona: Vienna.) 

Enomoto, S., and Ajisaka, T. (1984). Marine benthic algae of Papua New Guinea: Chlorophyceae 

(preliminary report). In 'Prompt Report of the 3rd Scientific Survey of the South Pacific'. (Eds K. 

Nakano et al.) pp. 35-38. (Kagoshima University Research Centre South Pacific: Kagoshima.) 

Esper, E. J. C. (1800). 'Icones Fucorum.' (Niirnberg.) 

Eubank, L. L. (1946). Hawaiian representatives of the Genus Caulerpa. University of California 

Publications in Botany 18(18), 409-432. 

Falkenberg, P. (1901). Die Rhodomelaceen des Golfes von Neapel und der angrenzenden 

Meeres-Abschnitte. Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel, Monographie 26, 1-754. 

Feldmann, J. (1938). Sur un nouveau genre de SiphonocladacCes. Cornptes Rendus Hebdornadaires des 

SPances de 1'AcadPmie des Sciences (Paris) 206, 1503-1504. 

Feldmann, J., and Hamel, 6. (1936). FloridPes de France VII: Gelidiales. Revue Algologique 9,85-140. 

Fiji M. A. F. (1983). 'The Fishery Resources of Rotuma.' (Fiji Ministry of Agriculture and Fisheries, 

Fisheries Division: Suva.)


Forsskbl, P. (1775). 'Flora Aegyptiaco-Arabica.' (Copenhagen.) 

Fortes, M. D., and Trono, G. C. Jr (1979). Marine algal microphytes new to the Philippines. Kalikasan, 

Philippines Journal of Biology 8(1), 51-68. 

Foslie, M. H. (1897). On some Lithothamnia. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter 

1897(1), 1-20. 

Foslie, M. H. (1898). List of species of the Lithothamnia. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs 

Skrifter 1898(3), 1-1 1. 

Foslie, M. H. (1900~). Calcareous algae from Funafuti. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs 

Skrifter 1900(1), 1-12. 

Foslie, M. H. (1900b). Revised systematical survey of the Melobesiaceae. Det Kongelige Norske 

Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter 1900(5), 1-22. 

Foslie, M. H. (1901~). New Melobesieae. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrifter 

1900(6), 1-24. 

Foslie, M. H. (1901b). Corallinaceae. Botanisk Tidsskrift 24, 15-22. 

Foslie, M. H. (1901~). Bieten die Heydrich 'schen Melobesien-arbeiten eine sichere Grundlage? Det 

Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrijier 1901(2), 1-28. 

Foslie, M. H. (1904). Lithothamnioneae, Melobesieae, Mastophoreae. In 'The Corallinaceae of the 

Siboga Expedition'. (Eds A. Weber-van Bosse and M. H. Foslie.) pp. 10-77. (Brill: Leiden.) 

Foslie, M. H. (1909). Algologiske notiser VI. Det Kongelige Norske Videnskabers Selskabs Skrijier 

1909(2), 1-63. 

Fritsch, F. E. (1945). 'The Structure and Reproduction of the Algae. Volume 11. Foreword, 

Phaeophyceae, Rhodophyceae, Myxophyceae.' (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge.) 

Gabrielson, P. W., and Kraft, G. T. (1984). The marine algae of Lord Howe Island (NSW), the Family 

Solieriaceae (Gigartinales, Rhodophyta). Brunonia 7, 217-251. 

Gadow, H. (1898). List of the birds of the island of Rotumah. Ibis 4(7), 42-45. 

Garbary, D. J. (1979). Numerical taxonomy and generic circumscription in the Acrochaetiaceae 

(Rhodophyta). Botanica Marina 22,477-492. 

Garbary, D. J., Oliviera, J. C, Scagel, R. F, and Villeneuve, S. (1991). Notes and distribution records for 

the marine algae of Fiji. Micronesica 24,249-260. 

Gardiner, J. S. (1898). The geology of Rotuma. Geological Society of London Quarterly Journal 54, 

1-11. 

Garrigue, C., and Tsuda, R. T. (1988). Catalog of Marine Benthic Algae from New Caledonia. 

Micronesica 21, 53-70. 

Gepp, A., and Gepp, E. S. (1904). Rhipidosiphon and Callipsygnm. Journal of Botany 42,363-366. 

Gepp, A., and Gepp, E. S. (1911). The Codiaceae of the Siboga Expedition, including a monograph of 

Flabellariae and Udoteae. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie 62, 1-150. 

Gilbert, W. J. (1942). Notes on Caulerpa from Java and the Philippines. Papers of the Michigan 

Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 27, 7-26. 

Gilbert, W. J. (1943). Studies on Philippines Chlorophyceae. I: the Dasycladaceae. Papers of the 

Michigan Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters 28, 15-35. 

Gilbert, W. J. (1946). Studies on Philippine Chlorophyceae. 11. Survey of literature and list of recorded 

species prior to 1940. Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 73(1), 73-79. 

Gilbert, W. J. (1947). Studies on Philippines Chlorophyceae. 111. The Codiaceae. Bulletin of the Torrey 

Botanical Club 74(2), 121-132. 

Gilbert, W. J. (1961). An Annotated Checklist of Philippine Marine Chlorophyta. The Philippine 

Journal of Science 88(4), 413-449. 

Gordon-Mills, E. (1987). Morphology and taxonomy of Chondria tenuissiina and Chondria dasyphylla 

(Rhodomelaceae, Rhodophyta) from European waters. British Phycological Journal 22,237-255. 

Gordon, G. D., Masaki, T., and Akioka, H. (1976). Floristic and distributional account of the common 

crustose coralline algae on Guam. Micronesica 12(2), 247-277. 

Gray, J. E. (1864). 'Handbook of British Water-weeds or Algae: The Diatomaceae by W. Carruthers.' 

(R. Hardwicke: London.) 

Greville, R. K. (1822-1828). 'Scottish Cryprogamic Flora.' (Maclachlan and Stewart: Edinburgh.) 

Greville, R. K. (1830). 'Algae Britannicae.' (Maclachlan and Stewart: Edinburgh.) 

Grunow, A. (1867). Algae. In 'Reise der Osterreichischen Fregatte Novara um die Erde in den Jahren 

1857 1858 1859: Botanischer Theil, Erster band: Sporenpflanzen.' (Ed. E. Fenzl.) pp. 1-104. 

(Hamburg.) 

Grunow, A. (1874). Algen der Fidschi-, Tonga- und Samoa-Inseln, gesammelt von Dr. E. Graeffe. 

Erste Folge, Phaeosporae, Fucoideae und Floridae. Journal Museum Godefroy (Hamburg) 3,23-50. 

Hamel, G. (1927). Recherches sur les Genres Acrochaetium Naeg. et Rhodochorton Naeg. PhD Thesis, 

UniversitC de Paris, Saint-Lo.


Haritonidis, S., and Tsekos, I. (1976). Marine algae of the Greek west coast. Botanica Marina 12, 

273-286. 

Harvey, W. H. (1846-1851). 'Phycologia Britannica.' Vol. 1-111. (Reeve: London.) 

Harvey, W. H. (1847-1849). 'Nereis Australis.' (Reeve:London.) 

Harvey, W. H. (1853). Nereis boreali-americana, Part 11, Rhodospermeae. Smithsonian Contributions to 

Knowledge 5(5), 1-258. 

Harvey, W. H. (1855). Some account of the marine botany of the Colony of Western Australia. 

Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy 22 (Science), 525-566. 

Harvey, W. H. (1858). Nereis boreali-americana, Part 111, Chlorospermeae. Smithsonian Contributions 

to Knowledge 10(2), 1-140. 

Harvey, W. H. (1859). 'Phycologia Australica.' Vol. 2. (Reeve: London.) 

Harvey, W. H. (1860). Characters of New Algae, Chiefly from Japan and Adjacent Regions, Collected 

by Charles Wright in the North Pacific Exploring Expediton under Captain John Rodgers. 

Proceedings of the American Academy of Arts and Sciences 4,327-335. 

Harvey, W. H., and Bailey, J. W. (1851). Description of seventeen new species of algae, collected by 

the United States Exploring Expedition. proceedings of the Boston society of Natural History 3, 

370-373. 

Hatta, A. M., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1991). A Taxonomic Revision of Indonesian 

Gelidiales (Rhodophyta). Blumea 35, 347-380. 

Heijs, F. M. L. (1987). Community structure and seaonality of macroalgae in some mixed seagrass 

meadows from Papua New Guinea. Aquatic Botany 27, 139-158. 

Hering, C. (1841). Diagnoses algarum novarum a cl. Dre. Ferdinand Krauss in Africa australi lectarum. 

Annals and Magazine of Natural History 8,90-92. 

Heydrich, F. (1897). Neue Kalkagen von Deutsch-Neu-Guinea (Kaiser Wilhelms-Land). Bibliotheca 

Botanica 41, 1-1 1. 

Heydrich, F. (1901). Die Entwicklungsgeschichte des Corallineen-Genus Perispermon Heydrich. 

Berichte der Deutschen Botanischen Gessellschaft. 19,409-420. 

Hillis, L. (1959). A revision of the genus Halimeda (order Siphonales). Publications of the Institute of 

Marine Science, University of Texas 6, 321403. 

Hillis-Colinvaux, L. (1980). Ecology and taxonomy of Halimeda primary producers of coral reefs. 

Advances in Marine Biology 17, 1-327. 

Hoek, C. van den. (1982). 'A Taxonomic Revision of the American Species of Cladophora 

(Chlorophyceae) in the North Atlantic Ocean and their Geographic Distribution.' (North-Holland 

Publishing Company: Amsterdam.) 

Hoek, C. van den. (1984). World-wide latitudinal and longitudinal seaweed distribution patterns and 

their possible causes, as illustrated by the distribution of Rhodophytan genera. Helgolander 

Meeresunters 38,227-257. 

Holden, B. J. (1992). Coastal Processes and the Rotuma Wharf, Fiji. SOPAC Technical Report No. 146, 

Fiii. 

Hollenberg, G. J. (1968~). An account of the species of Polysiphonia of the Central and Western 

Tropical Pacific Ocean. I. Oligosiphonia. Pacifc Science 22(1), 5697. 

Hollenberg, G.J. (1968b). An account of the species of the Red alga Polysiphonia of the Central and 

Western Tropical Pacific Ocean. 11. Polysiphonia. Pacific Science 22(2), 198-207. 

Hollenberg, G.J. (196%). An account of the species of the red algae Herposiphonia occurring in the 

central and western tropical Pacific Ocean. Pacific Science 22(3), 536-559. 

Hornig, I., Schnetter, R., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1992). The genus Dictyota 

(Phaeophyceae) in the North Atlantic. I. A new generic concept and new species. Nova Hedwigia 

54, 45-62. 

Howe, M.A. (1907). Phycological studies. 111. Further notes on Halimeda and Avrainvillea. Bulletin of 

the Torrey Botanical Club 34,491-516. 

Howe, M. A. (1909). Phycological Studies, IV. The Genus Neomeris and Notes on Other Siphonales. 

Bulletin of the Torrey Botanical Club 36, 75-104. 

Howe, M. A. (1914). The Marine Algae of Peru. Memoirs of the Torrey Botanical Club 15, 1-185. 

Howe, M. A. (1920). Algae. In 'The Bahama Flora'. (Eds N. L. Britton and C. F. Millspaugh.) 

pp. 553-618. (M. A. Howe: New York.) 

Howe, M. A. (1932). Marine algae from the Islands of Panay and Negros (Philippines) and Niuafoou 

(between Samoa and Fiji). Journal ofthe Washington Academy of Science 22, 167-170. 

Hudson, W. (1762). 'Flora Anglica.' (J. Nourse: London.) 

Huisman, J. M., and Borowitzka, M. A. (1990). A revision of the Australian species of Galaxaura 

(Rhodophyta, Galaxauraceae), with a description of Tricleocarpa gen. nov. Phycologia 29, 150-172. 

Itono, H. (1973). Notes on marine algae from Heteruma Island, Ryukyu. Botany Magazine Tokyo 86, 

155-168.


Itono, H. (1980). The genus Galaxaura (Rhodophyta) in Micronesia. Micronesica 16, 1-19. 

Itono, H. (1985~). Some noteworthy species of Galaxaura (Chaetangiaceae, Rhodophyta) from Fiji. 

Kagoshinla Universify Research Center South Pacific Occasional Papers 5,43-51. 

Itono, H. (19856). Rhodolachne radicosa, a new species of red algae (Rhodomelaceae, Ceramiales) 

from Fiji and southern parts of Japan. Kagoshima University Research Center South Pacific 

Occasional Papers 5,53-64. 

Itono, H., and Ajisaka, T. (1984). Taxonomic study on the marine algae from Fiji. Research Centre for 

So~lth Pacific, Kagoshinta University Report 4, 84-86. 

Jaasund, E. (1970~). Marine algae in Tanzania 11. Botanica Marina 13,5944. 

Jaasund, E. (1970b). Marine algae in Tanzania 111. Botanica Marina 13,65-70. 

Jaasund, E. (1970~). Marine algae in Tanzania IV. Botanica Marina 13,71-79. 

Jaasund, E. (1976). 'Seaweeds in Tanzania.' (University of Tromsgi: Tromse) 

Jaasund, E. (1977). Marine algae in Tanzania VIII. Botanica Marina 20,509-520. 

Johansen, H. W. (1977). The articulated Corallinaceae (Rhodophyta) of South Africa. Cheilosporum 

(Decaisne) Zanardini. Journal of South African Botany 43, 163-185. 

Jones, R., and Kraft, G. T. (1984). The genus Codium (Codiales, Chlorophyta) at Lord Howe Island 

(NSW). Brunonia 7,253-276. 

Kapraun, D. F., and Bowden, W . A. (1978). Additions to the benthic marine algal flora of Fiji. 

Micronesica 14, 199-207. 

Kasahara, H. (1985). Marine Green and Red Algae Collected at Viti Levu and Ndravuni Islands of Fiji. 

MSc Thesis, Kyoto University, Kyoto. 

Kasahara, H. (1988). 'Description and Illustrations of Marine Chlorophyceae Collected at Viti Levu, 

Suva, Makaluva and Ovalau, Fiji.' 

Kermarrec, A. (1974). Reproduction et Cycle de developpement des Bryopsis. PhD Thesis, University 

of Paris. 

King, R. J., and Puttock, C. F. (1986). Bostrychia pinnata J. Tanaka et Chirara in Australia. Bulletin of 

the National Science M~bseunz, Tokyo, Series B 12, 17-24. 

King, R. J., and Puttock, C. F. (1989). Morphology and Taxonomy of Bostrychia and Stictosiphonia 

(Rhodome1aceae:Rhodophyta). Australian Systematic Botany 2, 1-73. 

Kjellman, F. R. (1900). Om floride-slagtet Galaxaura dess organografi och systematik. Kungliga 

Svenska Vetenskapsakaderniens Handlingar 33, 1-1 09. 

Koeman, R. P. T. (1985). 'The taxonomy of Ulva Linnaeus 1753, and Enteromorpha Link 1820, 

(Chlorophyceae) in the Netherlands.' (University of Groningen: Groningen.) 

Kraft, G. T. (1984). Taxonomic and morphological studies of tropical and subtropical species of 

Callophycus (Solieriaceae, Rhodophyta). Phycologia 23,53-71. 

Gaft, G. T., and Olsen-Stojkovich, J. (1985). Avrainvillea calithina (Udoteaceae, Bryopsidales), a new 

green alga from Lord Howe Island, NSW, Australia. Phycologia 24,339-345. 

Gauss, F. (1846). Pflanzen des Cap- und Natal-Landes. Flora, Trevision 14,209-219. 

Kuckuck, P. (1963). Ectocaipaceen studien VIII. In 'Ectocarpaceen Studien von Paul Kuckuck'. (Ed. P. 

Kornmann.) pp. 195-216. (Biologische Anstalt: Helgoland.) 

Kutzing, F. T. (1841). Ueber Ceranziurn. Linnaea 15,727-746. 

Kiitzing, F. T. (1843). 'Phycologia Generalis.' (F. A. Brockhaus: Leipzig.) 

Kiitzing, F. T. (1845). 'Phycologia Germanica.' (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kiitzing, F. T. (1853). 'Tabulae Phycologicae.' Vol. 111. (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kiitzing, F. T. (1855). 'Tabulae Phycologicae.' Vol. V. (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kiitzing, F. T. (1856). 'Tabulae Phycologicae.' Vol. VI. (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kutzing, F. T. (1858). 'Tabulae Phycologicae.' Vol. VIII. (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kutzing, F. T. (1866). 'Tabulae Phycologicae.' Vol. XVI. (W. Koehne: Nordhausen.) 

Kylin, H. (1906). Zur Kenntnis einiger schwedischen Chantrasia-Arten. In 'Botaniska Studier 

tillagnade F. R. Kjellman den 4 November 1906'. pp. 113-126 (Uppsala.) 

Kylin, H. (1956). 'Die Gattungen der Rhodophyceen.' (C. W. K. Gleerups Forlag: Lund.) 

Kylin, H. (1938). Verzeichnis Einiger Rhodophyceen Von Sudafrica. Lunds Universitets Arsskrift. N. F. 

Avd.2, Bd 34. Nr 8, 1-26. 

Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1805). 'Dissertations sur Plusieurs Esptces de Fucus.' (J. V. F. Lamouroux: 

Agen.) 

Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1809~). MCmoires sur les Caulerpes, nouveau genres de la famille des algues 

marines. Journal de Botanie 2, 136-146. 

Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1809b). Observation sur la physiologie des algues marines, et description de cinq 

nouveaux genres de cette famille. Nouveau Bulletin des Science de la Societe Philoinatique de Paris 

1,330-333.


Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1812). Extrait d'une memoire sur la classification des polypiers corallighes non 

entihrement pierreux. Nouveau Bulletin des Science de la Societe Philorizatique de Paris 3, 181-188. 

Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1813). Essai sur les genres de la famille des thalassiophytes non articulCes. 

Annales du MusLuriz National dfHistoire Naturelle (Paris) 20,2147 115-139,267-293. 

Lamouroux, J. V. F. (1816). 'Histoire des Polypiers Coralligknes Flexibles, Vulgairement Nommes 

Zoophytes.' (J. V. F. Lamouroux: Caen.) 

Lee, R. K. S. (1967). Taxonomy and distribution of the Melobesioid algae on Rongelap atoll, Marshall 

Islands. Canadian Journal of Botany 45,985-1001. 

Lee, W .J., Boo, S. M., and Lee, I. K. (1991). Notes on the genus Bryopsis (Bryopsidaceae, 

Chlorophyta) from Ullungdo Island, Korea. Korean Journal of Phycology 6(1), 23-29. 

Le Jolis, A. (1863). Liste des algues marines de Cherbourg. Me'nzoires de la Socie'te' bnpe'riale des 

Sciences Naturelles de Cherbourg 10,5-168. 

Levring, T. (1960). A list of marine algae from Rennell Island. The Natural History of Rennell Island 

British Solor~zon Islands 3, 121-125. 

Lewis, J. A. (1984). Checklist and bibliography of benthic marine macroalgae recorded from northern 

Australia. I. Rhodophyta. Department of Defence, Defence Science and Technology Organisation 

Materials Research Laboratories Report MRL-R-912, Melbourne. 


Australia. 11. Phaeophyta. Department of Defence, Defence Science and Technology Organisation 



Australia. 111. Chlorophyta. Department of Defence, Defence Science and Technology Organisation 


Lewis, J. A., and Kraft, G. T. (1992). Zynzurgia, a new genus of the Halymeniceae (Gigartinales, 

Rhodophyta) from southern Australia. Phycologia 31, 285-299. 

Lewis, J. A., and Norris, J. N. (1987). A history and annotated account of the benthic marine algae of 

Taiwan. Snzithsonian Contributions to Marine Science 29, 1-38. 

Lindauer, V. W. (1949). Notes on marine algae of New Zealand. I. Pac(fic Science 3(4), 340-352. 

Linnaeus, C. (1758). 'Systema Naturae.' Vol.1, 12th Edn (Holmia: Stockholm.) 

Littler, D. S., and Littler, M. M. (1990~). Reestablishment of the Green Algal Genus Rhipidosiphon 

Montagne (Udoteaceae, Bryopsidales) with a description of Rhipidosiphon floridensis sp. nov. 

British Phycological Journal 25, 33-38. 

Littler, D. S., and Littler, M. M. (1990b). Systematics of Udotea species (Bryopsidales, Chlorophyta) in 

the tropical western Atlantic. Phycologia 29, 206-252. 

Littler, D. S., and Littler, M. M. (1992). Systematics of Avrainvillea (Bryopsidales, Chlorophyta) in the 

tropical western Atlantic. Phycologia 31, 375418. 

Littler, D. S., Littler, M. M., Bucher, K. E., and Norris, J. N. (1989). 'Marine Plants of the Caribbean.' 

(Smithsonian Institution Press: Washington.) 

Lucas, A. H. S. (1935). The marine algae of Lord Howe Island. Proceedings of the Linnean Sociery of 

New South Wales 60, 194-232. 

Lyngbye, H. C. (1819). 'Tentamem Hydrophytologia Danicae.' (Hafnia: Copenhagen.) 

Magruder, W. H., and Hunt, J. W. (1979). 'Seaweeds of Hawaii. A Photographic Identification Guide.' 

(Oriental Publishing Company: Honolulu.) 

MacRaild, G. N. (1978). Marine algae of the Cook and Fiji Islands. In 'Proceedings of the International 

Symposium on Marine Biogeography and Evolution in the Southern Hemisphere'. pp. 455464. (NZ 

DSIR: Auckland, New Zealand.) 

Mazoyer, G. (1938). Les Ctramites de 1'Afrique du Nord. Bulletin de la Societe d'Histoire Naturelle 

dlAfrique du Nord 29, 3 17-33 1. 

McCully, M. E., Goff, L. G., and Adshead, P. C. (1980). Preparation of algae for light microscopy. In 

'Handbook of Phycological Methods-Developmental and Cytological Methods'. (Ed. E. Gantt.) 

pp. 263-280. (Cambridge University Press: Cambridge.) 

McVaugh, R., Ross, R., and Stafleu, F. A. (1968). 'An Annotated Glossary of Botanical Nomenclature.' 

(International Bureau for Plant Taxonomy and Nomenclature of the International Association for 

Plant Taxonomy: Utrecht, Netherlands.) 

Menard, H. W., and Hamilton, E. L. (1963). Paleogeography of the Tropical Pacific. In 'Pacific Basin 

Biogeography: A Symposium'. (Ed. J. L. Gressitt.) (Bishop Museum Press: Honolulu.) 

MeAez, E. G. (1961). The marine algae of the Hundred Islands, Philippines. Philippine Journal of 

Science 90,37-86. 

MeAez, E. G., and Calumpong, H. P. (1982). The genus Caulerpa from Central Visayas, Philippines. 

Snzithsonian Contributions to Marine Science 17, 1-21. 

Merten, M. J. (1971). Ecological observations of Halinzeda macroloba Decaisne (Chlorophyta) on 

Guam. Micronesica 7, 27-44.


Millar, A. J. K. (1990). Marine red algae of the Coffs Harbour region, northern New South Wales. 

Australian Systematic Botany 3, 293-593. 

Millar, A. J. K., and Kraft, G. T. (1993). Catalogue of marine and freshwater red algae (Rhodophyta) of 

New South Wales, including Lord Howe Island, south-western Pacific. Australian Systematic 

Botany 6, 1-90. 

Millar, A. J. K., and Kraft, G. T. (1994a). Catalogue of Marine Brown Algae (Phaeophyta) of New 

South Wales, including Lord Howe Island, south-western Pacific. Australian Systematic Botany 7, 

146. 

Millar, A. J. K., and Kraft, G. T. (1994b). Catalogue of marine benthic green algae (Chlorophyta) of 

New South Wales, including Lord Howe Island, south-western Pacific. Australian Systematic 

Botany 7,419-453 

Montagne, C. (1838). De l'organisation et du mode de reproduction des Caulerpes. Annales des 

Sciences naturelles. 

Montagne, C. (1839-1842). Plantae cellulares. In 'Histoire naturelle des Iles Canaries'. Vol. 3. (Eds P. 

Barker-Webb and S. Berthelot.) (Paris.) 

Montagne, C. (1842~). 'Prodromus Generum Specierumque Phycearum Novarum, in Itinere ad Polum 

Antarcticum ... Collectarum.' (Paris.) 

Montagne, C. (18426). Botanique, Plantes Cellulaires. In 'Histoire Physique, Politique et Naturelle de 

l'ile de Cuba'. Vol. 11. pp. 1- 549. (Paris.) 

Montagne, C. (1844). Plantae cellulares quas in insulis philippinensibus a cl. Cuming collectae 

recensuit, observationibus non nullis descriptionibusque illustravit C. Montagne, D. M. London 

Jo~irnal of Botany 3,658-662. 

Montagne, C. (1846). Phyceae. In 'Exploration Scientifique de l'Alg6rie Pendant les AnnCes 1840, 

1841, 1842, Sciences natureiles: Botanique'. (Ed. M. C. Durieu de Maisonneuve.) pp. 1-197. 

(Paris.) 

Montagne, C. (1856). 'Sylloge Generum Specierumque Cryptogamarum.' (Paris.) 

Montagne, C. (1857). Huitikme centurie de plantes cellulaires nouvelles, tant indighes qu'exotiques. 

DCcades IV, V. Annales de Science Naturelle Botanique, sCrie 4,7, 134-153. 

Moul, E. T. (1957). Preliminary report on the flora of Onotoa Atoll, Gilbert Islands. Scientific 

Investigntions in Micronesia, Pacific Science Board, Rutgers University. p. 48. 

Moul, E. T. (1959). The Halimeda and Caulerpa of Onota, Gilbert Islands. Bulletin of the Torrey 

Botanical Club 86(3), 159-165. 

Miiller, 0. F. (1782). 'Icones plantarum ... Florae danicae'. Vol. 5. (Havnia: Copenhagen.) 

Murray, G. (1889). On Boodlea, a new genus of Siphonocladaceae. Journal of the Linnean Society of 

London, Botany 25, 243-245. 

Nageli, C. (1846). Polysiphonia und Herposiphonia. Zeitschrifi Wisseuschafien Botanisk 3-4, Zurich. 

Nees, C. G. (1820). 'Horae Physicae Berolinenses.' (Bonna: Bonn.) 

Newhouse, J. (1954). Ecological and floristic notes on the Myxophyta of Raroia. Atoll Research 

Bulletin 33, 42-54. 

Ngan, Y., and Price. I. R. (1979). The intertidal algae of the mainland coast in the vicinity of 

Townsville, Queensland. Atoll Research Bcrlletin 237, 1-29. 

Nienhuis, P. H. (1975). 'Biosystematics and Ecology of Rhizocloniunz ripariunz (Roth) Harv. 

(Chlorophyceae:Cladophorales) in the Estuarine Area of the Rivers Rhine, Meuse and Scheldt.' 

(Rijksuniversiteit te Groningen: Rotterdam.) 

Norris, R. E. (1987). The systematic position of Gelidiopsis and Ceratodictyoiz (Gigartinales, 

Rhodophyceae), genera new to South Africa. South African Journal of Botany 53,239-246. 

Noi-ris, R. E. (1988). Structure and reproduction of Amansia and Melanarnansia gen. nov. (Rhodophyta, 

Rhodomelaceae) on the southeastern African coast. Journal of Phycology 24,209-223. 

Norris, R. E. (1992). The marine red algae of Natal, South Africa, Order Gelidiales (Rhodophyta). 

Memoirs of the Botanical Survey of South Africa 61, 1-43. 

Norris, R. E. (1995). Melananzansia glornerata, comb. nov., and Amansia rhodantha, two hitherto 

confused species of Indo-Pacific Rhodophyceae. Taxon 44,65-68. 

N'Yeurt, A. D. R. (1995). Meristotheca procumbens Gabrielson et Kraft (Gigartinales, Solieriaceae): an 

edible seaweed from Rotuma Island. South Pacific Journal of Natural Science 14,243-250. 

N'Yeurt, A. D. R., Keats, D. W., and Norris, R. E. (1995). Phacelocarpus neurymenioides sp. no. 

(Rhodophyta, Phaceloca~paceae): a new marine alga from Fiji. Botanica Marina 38,339-346. 

N'Yeurt, A. D. R., Littler, D. S., and Littler, M. M. (1996). Avrainvillea rotumensis sp. nov. 

(Bryopsidales, Chlorophyta), a peltate species from the South Pacific. Phycological Research 44(2), 

(in press). 

N'Yeurt, A. D. R., South, G. R., and Keats, D. W. (1996). A revised checklist of the benthic marine 

algae of Fiji (including the island of Rotuma). Micronesica 29(1), 49-96.


Ohba, H., and Enomoto, S. (1992). Marine flora around Motupore Island on the south coast of Papua 

New Guinea. Kagoshima University Research Centre South Pat@, Occasional Papers 23,25-32. 

Okamura, K. (1907-1909). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. I. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1909-1912). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. 11. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1913-1915). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. 111. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1916-1923). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. IV. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1916). List of marine algae collected in Caroline and Marshall Islands 1915. Botanical 

Magazine, Tokyo 30(349), 1-14. 

Okamura, K. (1923-1928). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. V. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1929-1932). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. VI. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Okamura, K. (1930). On the algae from the island Hatidyo. Records of the Oceanography Works of 

Japan 2,92-110. 

Okamura, K. (1931). On the algae from KBtBsho (Botel Tobago). Bulletin of the Biogeographical 

Society of Japan 2,95122. 

Okamura, K. (1933-1942). 'Icones of Japanese Algae.' Vol. VII. (Kazamashobo: Tokyo.) 

Olsen, J. L., and West, J. A. (1988). Ventricaria (Siphonocladaies-Cladophorales complex, 

Chlorophyta), a new genus for Valonia ventricosa. Phycologia 27, 103-108. 

Olsen-Stojkovich, J. (1985). A systematic study of the genus Avrainvillea Decaisne (Chlorophyta, 

Udoteaceae). Nova Hedwigia 41, 1-68. 

Papenfuss, G. F. (1943). Notes on algal nomenclature. 11. Gynznosorus J. Agardh. Anzerican Journal of 

Botany 30(7), 463-469. 

Papenfuss, G. F. (1956). Notes on South African Marine algae, IV. Journal of South African Botany 22, 

65-77. 

Papenfuss, G. F. (1977). Review of the genera of Dictyotales (Phaeophycophyta). Bulletin of the 

Japanese Society of Phycology 25,271-287. 

Papenfuss, G. F., Mshigeni, K. E., and Chiang, Y.-M. (1982). Revision of the red algal genus 

Galaxaura with specific reference to the species occurring in the western Indian Ocean. Botanica 

Marina 25,401-444. 

Parsons, M. J. (1975). Morphology and taxonomy of the Dasyaceae and the Lophothalieae 

(Rhodomelaceae) of the Rhodophyta. Australian Journal of Botany 23,549-713. 

Payri, C. E. (1988). Halimeda contribution to organic and inorganic production in a Tahitian reef 

system. Coral Reefs 6,251-252. 

Payri, C. E., and Meinesz, A. (1985~). Algae. Proceedings of the Flfth International Coral Reef 

Congress, Tahiti 6,498-5 18. 

Payri, C. E., and Meinesz, A. (1985b). Taxonomy and distribution of the genus Halimeda (Chlorophyta, 

Caulerpales) in French Polynesia. Proceedings of the Fifth International Coral Reef Congress, 

Tahiti 6,641-648. 

Penrose, D., and Chamberlain, Y. M. (1993). Hydrolithon ,farirzosunz (Lamouroux) comb. nov., 

implications for generic concepts in the Mastophoroideae (Corallinaceae. Rhodophyta). Phycologia 

32,295-303. 

Philippi, R. (1837). Beweiss dass die Nulliporen Pflanzen sind. Arch. Naturgesch 3,387-393. 

Phillips, R. C., and Mefiez, E. G. (1988). Seagrasses. Snzithsonian Contributions to Marine Science 34, 

1-104. 

Piccone, A. (1884). 'Crociera del Corsaro alle Isole Madera e Canarie del Capitano Enrico D'Albertis: 

Alghe.' (Genoa.) 

Price, I. R., and Kraft, G. T. (1991). Reproductive development and classification of the red algal genus 

Ceratodictyon (Rhodymeniales. Rhodophyta). Phycologia 30, 106-1 16. 

Price, I. R., and Scott, F. J. (1992). 'The Turf Algal Flora of the Great Barrier Reef. Part I. 

Rhodophyta.' (James Cook University: Townsville.) 

Price, J. H., John, D. M., and Lawson, G. W. (1986). Seaweeds of the western coast of Tropical Africa 

and adjacent islands, a critical assessment. 1V. Rhodophyta (Florideae) 1. Genera A-F. Bulletin of 

the British Museum qf Natural History (Botany) 15, 1-122. 

Prud'homme van Reine, W. F., and van den Hoek, C. (1990). Biogeography of Macaronesian 

Seaweeds. Courier Forsch.-Inst Senckenberg 129,55-73. 

Raj, R. A. (1993). A floristic study of mangrove-associated algae in Fiji. MSc Thesis, The University of 

the South Pacific, Suva. 

Reinbolt, T. (1905). Einige neue Chlorophyceen aus dem Ind. Ocean (Niederl. Indien), gesammelt von 

A. Weber-van Bosse. Nuova Notarisia 16, 145-149. 

Richards, H. M. (1901). Cerarnothamnion codii, a new rhodophyceous algae. Bulletin of the Torrey 

Botanical Club 28,257-265. 

Rietema, H. (1975). Comparative investigations on the life-histories and reproduction of some species 

in the siphoneous green algal genera Bryopsis and Derbesia. PhD Thesis, Groningen University.


Rosenvinge, L. K. (1909). The marine algae of Denmark, contributions to their natural history, Part I, 

Introduction, Rhodophyceae I, (Bangiales and Nemalionales). Kongelige Danske Videnskabernes 

Selskabs Skrifer, Rekke, Naturvidenskabelig og Mathematisk Afdeling 7, 1-1 5 1. 

Roth, A. W. (1800). 'Catalecta Botanica.' (Leipzig.) 

Saito, Y. (1967). Studies on Japanese species of Laurencia, with special reference to their comparative 

morphology. Memoirs of the Faculty of Fisheries, Hokkaido University 15, 1-81. 

Santelices, B., and Stewart, J. G. (1984). Pacific species of Gelidium Lamouroux and other Gelidiales 

(Rhodophyta), with keys and descriptions to the common or economically important species. In 

'Taxonomy of Economic Seaweeds'. (Eds I. A. Abbott and J. N. Nonis.) pp. 17-31. (California Sea 

Grant College Programme: La Jolla.) 

Sartoni, G. (1979). Ricerche sulla flora algale della Somalia centro-meridionale. 2. I generi Halinteda 

ed Udorea. Webbia 33,279-300. 

Schiller, J. (1911). Botanische Beobachtungen, IV. Jahresber Ver Fijrd Naturwiss Erforsch Adria 6, 

89-91, 

Schlech, K. E., and Abbott, I. A. (1989). Species of Dasyaceae (Rhodophyta) from Hawaii. Pat@ 

Science 43,332-351. 

Schmitz, F. (1889). Systematische Uebersicht der bisher bekannten Gattungen der Florideen. Flora 72, 

435-456. 

Schmitz, F. (1895). Marine Florideen von Deutsch-Ostafrika. Botanische Jahrbucher,fiir Systematik, 

Pflanzengeschichre und Pflanzengeographie 21, 137-177. 

Schneider, C. W. (1983). The red algal genus Audouinella Bory (Nemaniales, Acrochaetiaceae) from 

North Carolina. Snzithsonian Contributions to Marine Science 22, 1-25. 

Schnetter, R., and Bula-Meyer, G. (1982). Marine algen der Pazifikkiiste von Kolombien: 

Chlorophyceae, Phaeophyceae, Rhodophyceae. Bibliotheca Phycologia 60, 1-287. 

Schramm, A,, and MazC, H. (1865). 'Essai de Classification des Algues de la Guadeloupe.' (Basse 

Terse.) 

Segawa, S. (1936). The development of the female reproductive organs in 'Nagaobane'. Plants and 

Animals 6, 1987-1990. 

Segawa, S. (1965). 'Coloured Illustrations of the Seaweeds of Japan.' Revised Edn (Hoikusha 

Publishers: Osaka.) 

Setchell, W. A. (1924). American Samoa, Part I: Vegetation of Tutuila Island. Carnegie Institution of 

Washington, P~~blications 341, 1-188. 

Setchell, W. A. (1926). Tahitian algae and Tahitian spermatophytes. University of Caltfornia 

P~lbications bz Botany 12, 61-143. 

Setchell, W. A. (1935). The Templeton Crocker expedition to western Polynesian and Melanesian 

Islands 1933. No. 21. Some marine plants of south-eastern Melanesia. Proceedings of the California 

Academy ($Science (Ser. 4) 21,259-276. 

Setchell, W. A., and Gardner, N. L. (1937). The Templeton Crocker Expedition of the California 

Academy of Sciences 1932, No. 31, A Preliminary Report on the Algae. Proceedings of the 

California Academy of Science 4, 22-98. 

Silva, P. C. (1960). Codiurn of the tropical western Atlantic. Nova Hedwigia 1,497-535. 

Silva, P. C., Meiiez, E. G., and Moe, R. L. (1987). Catalog of the benthic marine algae of the 

Philippines. Snzithsonian Contributions to Marine Science 27, 1-179. 

Sluiter, C. P. (1908). List of Algae Collected by the Fishery Inspection at Cura~ao. Records of the 

Travels in Botany, Nkerl. 4,231-241. 

Snow, P. A. (1969). 'A Bibliography of Fiji, Tonga, and Rotuma. Preliminary Working Edition.' 

(University of Miami Press: Miami.) 

Solms-Laubach, H. (1895). Monograph of the Acetabularieae. Transactions of the Lianean Society of 

London (Bot. ser 2) 5, 1-39. 

Sonder, 0 . G. (1845). Nova algarum genera et species, quas in itinere ad oras occidentales Novae 

Hollandiae, collegit L. Preiss, Ph.Dr. Botanische Zeit~ing 3,49-57. 

South, G. R. (1991). Benthic marine algae from Dravuni Island, Astrolabe Islands, Kadavu, Fiji. 

University of the South Pacific Marine Studies Programmme Technical Report 1991(5), Fiji. 

South, G. R. (1992). Contributions to a Catalogue of the Marine Algae of Fiji. 1. Halinzeda 

(Chlorophyceae). University of the South Pacific Marine Studies Programme Technical Report 1992 

(2). 

South, G. R. (1992). 'Cultivation of Benthic Marine Algae in Reef and Lagoonal Systems, with Special 

Reference to the Tropical South Pacific.' (Coral Reef Resources Systems Workshop, Australian 

Institute of Marine Science: Townsville.) 

South, G. R. (1993). Edible seaweeds of Fiji, an ethnobotanical study. Botanica Marina 36,335-349.


South, G. R., and Kasahara, H. (1992). A preliminary checklist of the benthic marine algae of the Fiji 

Islands, South Pacific. Micronesica 25,41-70. 

South, G. R., and N'Yeurt, A. D. R. (1993). Contributions to a catalogue of benthic marine algae of Fiji. 

11. Caulerpa and Caulerpella (Chlorophyta-Caulerpales). Micronesica 26, 109-138. 

South, G. R., and Tittley, I. (1986). 'A Checklist and Distributional Index of the Benthic Marine Algae 

of the North Atlantic Ocean.' (Huntsman Marine Laboratory and the British Museum (Natural 

History): London.) 

South, G. R., and Yen, S. (1992). Notes on the benthic marine algae of Nauru, Central Pacific. 

Micronesica 25, 123-13 1. 

South, G. R., N'Yeurt, A. D. R., and Raj-Prasad, R. A. (1993). Additions and amendments to the 

benthic marine algal flora of Fiji, including the island of Rotuma. Micronesica 26, 177-198. 

Stackhouse, J. (1795-1801). 'Nereis Britannica.' (Hazard: Bath.) 

Suhr, J. N. von (1840). Beitrage zur Algenkunde. Flora 23,257-298. 

Svedelius, N. (1906). Ecological and systematic studies of the Ceylon species of Caulerpa. Report of 

the Ceylonese Marine Biology Laboratory 4,81-144. 

Tanaka, T. (1941). The genus Hypnea from Japan. Scientific Papers of the Institute of Algological 

Research, Faculty of Science, Hokkaido Imperial University 2,227-250. 

Taylor, W. R. (1928). The marine algae of Florida, with special reference to the dry Tortugas. Carnegie 

Institution of Washington Publication 379, 1-219. 

Taylor, W. R. (1942). Caribbean marine algae of the Allan Hancock Expedition 1939. Allan Hancock 

Atlantic Expedition Reports 2, 1-1 93. 

Taylor, W. R. (1945). Pacific Marine Algae from the Allan Hancock Expeditions to the Galapagos 

Islands. Allan Hancock Pacifc Expeditions 12, 1-528. 

Taylor, W. R. (1950). 'Plants of Bikini and Other Northern Marshall Islands.' (University of Michigan 

Press: Ann Harbor.) 

Taylor, W. R. (1957). 'Marine Algae of the Northeastern Coast of North America.' 2nd Edn (University 

of Michigan Press: Ann Harbor.) 

Taylor, W. R. (1960). 'Marine Algae of the eastern Tropical and Subtropical Coasts of the Americas.' 

(University of Michigan Press: Ann Harbor.) 

Taylor, W. R. (1963). The genus Turbinaria in eastern seas. Journal of the Linnean Society (Botany) 58, 

475-490. 

Taylor, W. R. (1966). Records of Asian and western Pacific Marine algae, particularly algae from 

Indonesia and the Philippines. Pacific Science 20,342-359. 

Taylor, W. R. (1973). A New Halimeda (Chlorophyceae, Codiaceae) from the Philippines. Pacific 

Science 27,34-36. 

Taylor, W. R. (1977). Notes on plants of the genus Caulerpa in the Herbarium of Maxwell S. Doty at 

the University of Hawaii. Atoll Research Bulletin 208, 1-7. 

Tomlinson, P. B. (1986). The botany of mangroves. In 'Cambridge Tropical Biology Series'. (Eds P. S. 

Ashton, S. P. Hubbel, D. H. Janzen, P. H. Raven and P. B. Tomlinson.) pp. 1-382. (Cambridge 

University Press: London.) 

Trono, G. C. Jr. (1968). The marine benthic algae of the Caroline Islands, I. Introduction, Chlorophyta, 

and Cyanophyta. Micronesica 4, 137-206. 

Trono, G. C. Jr. (1969). The marine benthic algae of the Caroline Islands, 11. Phaeophyta and 

Rhodophyta. Micronesica 5, 25-1 19. 

Trono, G. C. Jr. (1971). Some new species of marine benthic algae from the Caroline Islands, 

western-central Pacific. Microrzesica 7,45-77. 

Trono, G. C. Jr. (1973). Studies on the benthic Chlorophyta of Puerto Galera, Oriental Mindoro, 

Philippines. UPNSRC Technical Report 1, Manilla. 

Trono, G. C. Jr. (1986). Philippines seaweeds. In 'Guide to PhiIippines Flora and Fauna'. pp. 203-287. 

(Ministry of Natural Resources and University of the Philippines: Manilla.) 

Tseng, C. K. (1942). Studies on Chinese species of Gr@thsia. Papers of the Michigan Academy of 

Science 27, 105-1 16. 

Tseng, C. K., Xia, B., Xia, E., Zhang, D., Zhang, J., Zhang, B., and Zhou, J. (1984). Rhodophyta. In 

'Common Seaweeds of China'. (Ed. C. K. Tseng.) pp. 43-165. (Science Press: Beijing.) 

Tsuda, R. T. (1964). Floristic report on the marine benthic algae of selected islands in the Gilbert 

Group. Atoll Research Bulletin 105, 1-13. 

Tsuda, R. T. (1972). Marine benthic algae of Guam. I. Phaeophyta. Micronesica 8(1-2), 87-115. 

Tsuda, R. T. (1976~). Occurrence of the genus Sargassurn (Phaeophyta) on two Pacific Atolls. 

Micronesica 12(2), 279-282. 

Tsuda, R. T. (1976b). Some marine benthic algae from Pitcairn Island. Revue Algologique, Nouvelle 

Skrie 11(3-4), 325-331.

Tsuda, R. T. (1991). Catalog of the marine benthic algae from the Ryukyu Islands, Japan. Galaxea 10, 

35-64. 

Tsuda, R. T., and Kamura, S. (1991). Floristics and geographic distribution of Halimeda (Chlorophyta) 

in the Ryukyu Islands. Japanese Journal of Phycology (S6rui) 39,57-76. 

Tsuda, R. T., and Trono, G. C. Jr. (1968). Marine Benthic Algae from Howland Island and Baker 

Island, Central Pacific. Pacific Science 22(2), 194-197. 

Tsuda, R. T., and Wray, F. 0. (1977). Bibliography of marine benthic algae in Micronesia. Micronesica 

13(1), 85-120. 

Tsuda, R. T., Fosberg, F. R., and Sachet, M.-H. (1977). Distribution of seagrasses in Micronesia. 

Micronesica 13(2), 19 1-198. 

Turner, D. (1808). 'Fuci Sive Plantarum Fucorum Generi a Botanicis Ascriptarum Icones, Descriptiones 

et Historia.' (London.) 

Turner, D. (1816-1819). 'Fuci Sive Plantarum Fucorum Generi a Botanicis Ascriptarum Icones, 

Descriptiones et Historia.' (London.) 

UNEP. (1988). The Fiji Islands. In 'Coral Reefs of the World. Vol. 3: Central and Western Pacific'. 

(Eds S. M. Wells and M. D. Jenkins.) pp. 73, 86. (United Nations Environment Programme, 

International Union for the Conservation of Nature and Natural resources: New York.) 

Vahl, M. (1802). Endeel Kryptogamiske planter (fuci) fra St. Croix. Skrifer af Naturhistorie Selskabet 

5(3), 29-47. 

Valet, G. (1968). Les algues marines de la Nouvelle-CalCdonie. I, Chlorophyctes. Nova Hedwigia 15, 

29-63. 

Valet, G. (1969). Contributions h l'ttude des Dasycladales, 2 et 3. Nova Hedwigia 17,551-644. 

Verheij, E. (1993). Nongeniculate Corallinaceae (Corallinales, Rhodophyta) from the Spermonde 

Archipelago, SW Sulawesi, Indonesia. In 'Marine Plants of the Reefs of the Spermonde 

Archipelago, SW Sulawesi, Indonesia: Aspects of Taxonomy, Floristics and Ecology'. (Ed. E. 

Verheij.) pp. 35-1 12. (RijksherbariudHortus Botanicus: Leiden.) 

Verheij, E., and Prud'homme van Reine, W. F. (1993). Seaweeds of the Spermonde Archipelago, SW 

Sulawesi, Indonesia. In 'Marine Plants of the Reefs of the Spermonde Archipelago, SW Sulawesi, 

Indonesia: Aspects of Taxonomy, Floristics and Ecology'. (Ed. E. Verheij.) pp. 113-238. 

(RijksherbariudHortus Botanicus: Leiden.) 

Vickers, A. (1905). Liste des algues marines de la Barbade. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, 

Botanique, series 9,45-66. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1898). Monographie des Caulerpes. Annales du Jardin de Buitenz 15,243-401. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1904). Corallinae verae of the Malay Archipelago. In ' The Corallinaceae of the 

Siboga-Expedition. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie'. (Eds A. Weber-van Bosse and M. Foslie.) pp. 

78-100. (Siboga-Expeditie Monographie.) 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1913~). Liste des algues du Siboga. I. Myxophyceae, Chlorophyceae, 

Phaeophyceae avec le concours de M. Th. Reinbold. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie 59% 1-186. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1913b). Marine Algae, Rhodophyceae, of the 'Sealark' Expedition, collected by 

Mr. J. Stanley Gardiner. Transactions of the Linnean Society, Botany 8, 105-142. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1921). Liste des algues du Siboga. 11. Rhodophyceae. PremiBre partie. 

Protofloridae, Nemalionales, Cryptonemiales. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie 59b, 187-23 1. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1923). Liste des algues du Siboga. 111. Rhodophyceae. Seconde partie. 

Ceramiales. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie 59c, 3 11-392. 

Weber-van Bosse, A. (1928). Liste des algues du Siboga. IV. Rhodophyceae. TroisiBme partie. 

Gigartinales et Rhodymeniales et tableau de la distribution des ChlorophycCes, Phaeophyctes et 

RhodophycCes de 1'Archipel Malaisien. Siboga-Expeditie Monographie 59d, 393-533. 

Woelkerling, Wm. J. (1973). The Audouinella complex (Rhodophyta) in the western Sargasso Sea. 

Rhodora 75,80-101. 

Woelkerling, W. J. (1976). South Florida Benthic Marine Algae, Keys and Comments. Sedirnenta V, 

University of Miami. 

Woelkerling, Wm. J. (1983). The Audouinella (Acrochaetiurn-Rhodochorton) complex (Rhodophyta), 

present perspectives. Phycologia 22,59-92. 

Woelkerling, Wm. J., and Campbell, S. J. (1992). An account of southern Australian species of 

Lithophyllurn (Corallinaceae, Rhodophyta). Bulletin of the British Museum (Natural History) 22, 

1-107. 

Womersley, H. B. S. (1967). A Critical Survey of the Marine Algae of southern Australia, 11, 

Phaeophyta. Australian Journal of Botany 15, 189-270. 

Womersley, H. B. S. (1984). 'The Marine Benthic Flora of Southern Australia. Part I. (Chlorophyta).' 

(Government Printer, South Australia: Adelaide.)


Womersley, H. B. S. (1987). 'The Marine Benthic Flora of Southern Australia. Part 11. (Phaeophyta).' 

(Government Printer, South Australia: Adelaide.) 

Womersley, H. B. S. (1994). 'The Marine Benthic Flora of Southern Australia. Part IIIA 

(Rhodophyta).' (Australian Biological Resources Study: Canberra.) 

Womersley, H. B. S., and Bailey, A. (1969). The marine algae of the Solomon Islands and their place in 

biotic reefs. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London, Botany 255,433-442. 

Womersley, H. B. S., and Bailey, A. (1970). Marine algae of the Solomon Islands. Philosophical 

Transactions of the Royal Society of London 259,257-352. 

Woodhall, D. (1987). Geology of Rotuma. Fiji Mineral Resources Department, Bulletin No. 8, Fiji. 

Woodward, T. J. (1794). Description of Fucus dasyphyllus. Transactions of the Linnean Society 

(London) 2,239-241. 

Wulfen, F. X. (1803). Cryptogama aquatica. Archivfiir die Botanik 3, 1-64. 

Wynne, M. J. (1985). Concerning the Names Scagelia corallina and Heterosiphonia wurdernanni 

(Ceramiales, Rhodophyta). Cryptogamie: Algologie 6, 81-90. 

Wynne, M. J. (1993). Benthic marine algae from the Maldives, Indian Ocean, collected during the RN 

Te Vega Expedition. Contributions to the University of Michigan Herbarium 19,5-30. 

Wynne, M. J., and Kraft, G. T. (1985). Hypoglossum caloglossoides sp. nov. (Delesseriaceae, 

Rhodophyta) from Lord Howe Island, South Pacific. British Phycological Journal 20,9-19. 

Xia, B., and Yamamoto, H. (1985). Gracilaria sp. from both China and Japan, Key, List and 

Distribution of common and economically important species. In 'Taxonomy of Economic 

Seaweeds'. (Eds I. A. Abbott and J. N. Norris,) pp. 1-167. (California Sea Grant College 

Programme: La Jolla.) 

Yamada, S. (1 940). Caulerpa in Micronesia. Kagaku Nanyo 3,ll-23. 

Yamada, Y. (1941). Species of Halimeda in the South Seas. Kagaku Nanyo 4,108-121. 

Yamada, Y. (1944). New Caulei~as and Halimedas from Micronesia. Scientific Papers of the Institute 

of Algological Research, Faculty of Science, Hokkaido Imperial University 3,27-29. 

Yamada, Y., and Tanaka, T. (1938). The marine algae from the island of Yonakuni. Scientific Papers of 

the Institute of Algological Research, Faculty of Science, Hokkaido Imperial University 2,53-86. 

Yamamoto, H. (1978). Systematic and anatomical study of the genus Gracilaria in Japan. Memoirs of 

the Faculty of Fisheries, Hokkuido University 25,97-152. 

Yoshida, T., Nakajima, Y., and Nakata, Y. (1990). Preliminary checklist of the marine benthic algae of 

Japan. 11. Rhodophyceae. Japanese Journal of Phycology 33,249-27. 

Young-Meng, C., Yoshida, T., Ajisaka, T., Trono, G.C. Jr, Tseng, C.K., and Lu, B. (1992). Distribution 

and variation in Sargassurn polycystuin C.A. Agardh (Fucales, Phaeophyta). In 'Taxonomy of 

Economic Seaweeds, with Reference to Some Pacific and Western Atlantic Species'. Vol. 111. (Ed. I. 

A. Abbott.) pp. 1-241. (California Sea Grant College, University of California: La Jolla.) 

Zanardini, G. (1844). Rivista suIIa Corallinee. Atti Istitut Veneto, Ser. 1,3, 186-188. 

Zanardini, G. (1858). Plantarum in mari Rubro hucusque collectarum enumeratio (juvante A. Figari). 

Memorie del Reale Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti 7,209-309. 

Zanardini, G. (1874). Phyceae australicae novae vel minus cognitae. Flora 57,486-505. 

Taxonomic Index 

Basionyms, synonyms and misapplied names are given in italics 

Acetabularia minutissima ............................................................. 397 

Acetabularia moebii ................................................................. 397 

Acetabularia parvula ............................................................... .396 

Acetabularia polyphysoides .......................................................... .397 

Acetabularia wettsteinii ............................................................. .397 

Acrocarpus pusillus ................................................................ .4 10 

Acrochaetium hallandicum ........................................................... .407 

Acrochaetium sargassi .............................................................. .407 

Actinotrichia fragilis ................................................................ .407 

Actinotrichia rigida ................................................................ .407 

Amansia glomerafa ................................................................. .428 

Amansia rhodantha ................................................................ .428 

Audouinellahallandica .............................................................. 407 

Audouinella polyblasta .............................................................. .406 

Avrainvillea amadelpha ............................................................. .392 

Avrainvillea lacerata var. robustior .................................................... .392

Avrainvillea rotumensis .............................................................. 393 

Bangia ceramicola .................................................................. 406 

Boergesenia forbesii ................................................................. 369 

Boodlea coacta ..................................................................... 368 

Bostrychiatenella ................................................................... 429 

Bryopsis arbuscula .................................................................. 374 

Bryopsis harveyana ................................................................. 373 

Bryopsis plumosa ................................................................... 374 

Bryopsis plurnosa var . secunda ........................................................ 373 

Caloglossa leprieurii f: pygrnaea ....................................................... 426 

Caloglossa vieillardii ................................................................ 426 

Caulerpachernnitzia ................................................................. 379 

Caulerpaclavifera .................................................................. 378 

Caulerpa clavifera var . turbinata ...................................................... 379 

Caulerpa cupressoides ............................................................... 375 

Caulerpa cupressoides var . lycopodium f . elegans .......................................... 376 

Caulerpa cupressoides var . mamillosa ................................................... 377 

Caulerpa cupressoides var . typica f: lycopodium .......................................... 376 

Caulerpafreycinetii ................................................................. 381 

Caulerpa freycinetii var . boryana f: occidentalis ........................................... 382 

Caulerpahumrnii ................................................................... 382 

Caulerpalycopodiurn ................................................................ 376 

Caulerparnamillosa ................................................................. 377 

Caulerpapeltata .................................................................... 378 

Caulerpa peltata8 nummularia ........................................................ 379 

Caulerpa peltata var . rtummularia ...................................................... 379 

Caulerpa plumaris .................................................................. 376 

Caulerpa racemosa .................................................................. 377 

Caulerpa racernosa var . chemnitzia ..................................................... 380 

Caulerpa racemosa var . clavifera ....................................................... 378 

Caulerpa racemosa var . peltata ......................................................... 378 

Caulerpa racemosa var . turbinata ....................................................... 379 

Caulerpa racemosa var . uvifera ........................................................ 380 

Caulerpaserrulata ................................................................... 381 

Caulerpa serrulata var . boryana f . occidentalis ............................................ 382 

Caulerpauvifera .................................................................... 380 

Centroceras apiculatum .............................................................. 420 

Centroceras clavulatum .............................................................. 421 

Centroceras clavulatum var . cryptacanthurn .............................................. 421 

Centroceras cryptacartthum ........................................................... 421 

Centroceras hyalacanthum ............................................................ 421 

Cerarnium clavulaturn ............................................................... 421 

Ceramium codii .................................................................... 422 

Ceramium mazatlanense .............................................................. 422 

Cerarnium serpens .................................................................. 422 

Ceramium vagabundum .............................................................. 423 

Ceramium vagans ................................................................... 423 

Ceramium zacae .................................................................... 423 

Cerarnotharnnion adriaticum .......................................................... 422 

Ceramotharnnioncodii ............................................................... 422 

Ceratodictyon ...................................................................... 418 

Champia parvula .................................................................... 417 

Chantransiahallandica .............................................................. 406 

Charztransia polyblasta .............................................................. 406 

Chauviniaclavifera ................................................................. 378 

Cheilosporum spectabile ............................................................. 411 

Chlorodesmis hildebrandtii ........................................................... 393 

Chlorodesmis major ................................................................. 394 

Chlorodesmis torresiensis ............................................................ 394 

Chloroplegrna sordidum .............................................................. 392 

Chnoosporaatlarttica ................................................................ 403 

Chnoospora fastigiata ............................................................... 403 

Chnoospora minima ................................................................. 403

Benthic Marine Aigae of Rotuma Island 45 1 

Chnoosporapacifica ................................................................ 403 

Chondriadasyphylla ................................................................. 430 

Chondria parvula ................................................................... 417 

Chondria sedifoiia .................................................................. 430 . 

Chondria simpliciuscula .............................................................. 431 

Cladophora? anastomosans ........................................................... 369 

Cladophoracoacta .................................................................. 368 

Cladophoraconferta ................................................................. 366 

Cladophora uncinata ................................................................ 366 

Cladophoropsis sundanensis ........................................................... 370 

Cladophoropsis zollingeri ............................................................ 371 

Codium adhaerens .................................................................. 383 

Codium arabicum ................................................................... 383 

Codiumbulbopilum ................................................................. 384 

Codiurncoronatum .................................................................. 383 

Codiumsp ......................................................................... 384 

Codiurn ovule ....................................................................... 384 

Coelarthrum boergesenii ............................................................. 418 

Coelarthrumcoactunz ................................................................ 418 

Coelothrix irregularis ................................................................ 419 

Confewa carnea .................................................................... 406 

Cortfervaflexuosa ................................................................... 365 

Corallina opwitia ................................................................... 388 

Corallinarubens .................................................................... 413 

Corallina tuna ..................................................................... 391 

Cordylecladia? irregularis ............................................................ 419 

Dasya callithamnion ................................................................. 426 

Dasya subsecunda .................................................................. 426 

Dasya subsecundata ................................................................. 426 

Dictyopteris repens .................................................................. 399 

Dictyosphaeria cavernosa ............................................................. 371 

Dictyosphaeria favulosa .............................................................. 371 

Dictyota friabilis .................................................................... 400 

Dictyotavariegata .................................................................. 401 

Dilophus radicans ................................................................... 400 

Echinocaulorz acerosunz .............................................................. 409 

Ectocarpus breviarticulatus ........................................................... 397 

Enteromorpha flexuosa ............................................................... 365 

Enterornorpha intermedia ............................................................ 366 

Enterornorpha intestinalis$ tubulosa ................................................... 366 

Enteromorpha intestinalis var . tubulosa ................................................. 365 

Enterornorpha tubulosa .............................................................. 366 

Eryrhrotrichia biseriata .............................................................. 406 

Erythrotrichia carnea ................................................................ 406 

Fosliella farinosa ................................................................... 412 

Fucus acerosus ..................................................................... 409 

Fucus chemnitzia ................................................................... 379 

Fucus clavifer ...................................................................... 378 

Fucus cupressoides .................................................................. 375 

Fucus dasyphyllus .................................................................. 430 

Fucus fragilis ...................................................................... 407 

Fucusrnirzimus ..................................................................... 403 

Fucus pusillus ...................................................................... 410 

Fucus racemosa .................................................................... 377 

Fucus rigidus ...................................................................... 409 

Fucus serrulatus .................................................................... 381 

Fucus spiniformis ................................................................... 409 

Fucus tenellus ...................................................................... 429 

Fucus turbinatus var . ornatus .......................................................... 405 

Fucus uvifer ....................................................................... 380 

Galaxaura Blamentosa ............................................................... 408 

Galaxaura lapidescens ............................................................... 408 

Galaxaura rigida ................................................................... 407

452 A . D . R . N'Yeurt 

Galaxaura rugosa ................................................................... 408 

Galaxaurarudis .................................................................... 408 

Gelidiella acerosa ................................................................... 408 

Gelidium pusillum .................................................................. 410 

Gelidiopsis intricata ................................................................. 417 

Gelidiopsisrigida ................................................................... 409 

Gelidiumrigidum ................................................................... 409 

Gelidiumspiniforme ................................................................. 409 

Gzyordia breviarticulata ............................................................. 397 

Goniolithon rnoluccense .............................................................. 414 

Goniolithonpygmaeum .............................................................. 414 

Gracilaria sp . aff . G . textorii ........................................................... 415 

Griflthsiaargus .................................................................... 425 

Griffithsia subcylindrica .............................................................. 424 

Gymnosorusvariegatus .............................................................. 401 

Halimedabikinensis ................................................................. 385 

Halimeda cordata ................................................................... 388 

Halimedacuneata ................................................................... 386 

Halimeda cuneataf: digitata .......................................................... 386 

Halimedadiscoidea ................................................................. 386 

Halimeda discoideaf: intermedia ...................................................... 386 

Halimeda discoidea f: subdigitata ...................................................... 386 

Halimeda discoidea var . platyloba ..................................................... 386 

Halimeda incrassataf: distorta ........................................................ 389 

Halimeda incrassata var . simulans ..................................................... 390 

Halimedamacrophysa ............................................................... 387 

Halimedamicronesica ............................................................... 387 

Halimedaobovata .................................................................. 386 

Halimedaopuntia ................................................................... 388 

Halimedaopuntiaforma ............................................................. 389 

Halimeda opuntiaf: cordata .......................................................... 388 

Halimeda opuntia f: triloba ........................................................... 389 

Halimeda opuntia var . macrocarpa ..................................................... 389 

Halimeda opuntiafi hederacea ........................................................ 389 

Ha1imedaopuntiavar.hederacea ....................................................... 389 

Halimeda opuntia var . opuntia ......................................................... 389 

Halimeda orientalis ................................................................. 388 

Halimedasimulans .................................................................. 390 

Halimedataenicola .................................................................. 390 

Halimedatriloba ................................................................... 389 

Halimedatuna .................................................................. 386. 391 

Halimeda tunaf: albertisii ............................................................ 391 

Halimeda tuna$ platydisca ........................................................... 391 

Halimeda tuna var . platydisca ......................................................... 391 

Halirneda versatilis .................................................................. 386 

Haliserisrepens .................................................................... 399 

Hemitrema elegans .................................................................. 427 

Herposiphonia secunda f . tenella ....................................................... 431 

Herposiphoniaparca ................................................................ 432 

Herposiphoniatenella ............................................................... 431 

Heterosiphonia callithamnion ......................................................... 426 

Heterosiphonia crispella var . laxa ...................................................... 425 

Heterosiphoniasubsecundata .......................................................... 426 

Heterosiphonia wurdemannii .......................................................... 425 

Hincksiabreviarticulata .............................................................. 397 

Hutchinsiatenella ................................................................... 431 

Hydrolithon farinosum ............................................................... 412 

Hypnea nidulans .................................................................... 415 

Hypneapannosa .................................................................... 415 

Hypoglossum caloglossoides .......................................................... 426 

Janiaadhaerens ..................................................................... 413 

Janiarubens ....................................................................... 413 

Laurencia venusta ................................................................... 432


Laurenciasp ....................................................................... 433 

Liagoravalida ...................................................................... 410 

Lithophyllurn moluccense ............................................................. 414 

Lithophyllurn moluccenseJ: torquescerzs ................................................. 414 

Lithophyllum tamiense ............................................................... 414 

Lithophyllum torquescens ............................................................. 414 

Lithothamrtion moluccense ............................................................ 414 

Lithothamnion pygmaeum ............................................................ 414 

Lobophora rzigrescens ............................................................... 401 

Lobophora variegata ................................................................. 401 

Martensia elegans ................................................................... 427 

Melanamansia glomerata ............................................................. 428 

Melobesia farinosa .................................................................. 412 

Meristotheca procumbens ............................................................. 416 

Mesotreinaelegans .................................................................. 427 

Neomeris durnetosa ................................................................. 396 

Neomeris vanbosseae ................................................................ 396 

Neurocarpusrepens ................................................................. 399 

Padinaboryana .................................................................... 402 

Padina commersonii ................................................................. 402 

Padina tenuis ..................................... ................................. 402 

Peyssonnelia rubra var . orientalis ...................................................... 411 

Peyssonnelia sp ..................................................................... 411 

Plocamium tenellum ................................................................. 429 

Pocockiella nigrescens ............................................................... 401 

Pocockiella variegata ................................................................ 401 

Polyphysaparvula .................................................................. 396 

Polysiphonia scopulorum ............................................................. 433 

Polysiphonia scopulorum var . scopulomm ............................................... 433 

Rhipidosiphon javensis ............................................................... 394 

Rhipilia orientalis ................................................................... 395 

Rhizoclonium africanum ............................................................. 367 

Rhizoclonium grande ................................................................ 368 

Rhizoclonium hookeri ................................................................ 367 

Rhizoclonium samoense .............................................................. 367 

Rhodymenia divaricata ............................................................... 419 

Sargassum polycystum ............................................................... 403 

Sargassum sp ....................................................................... 404 

Sphacelaria rigidula ................................................................. 398 

Sphacelaria furcigera ................................................................ 398 

Sphaerococcus infricarus ............................................................. 418 

Sphaerococcus rigidus ............................................................... 409 

Struvea anastomosans ................................................................ 369 

Struvea delicatula ................................................................... 369 

Turbinariaomata ................................................................... 405 

Udoteaamadelpha .................................................................. 392 

Udotea javensis .................................................................... 394 

Ulva cavernosa ..................................................................... 371 

Ulvaflexuosa ...................................................................... 365 

Ulva plumosa ...................................................................... 374 

Valonia aegagropila ................................................................. 372 

Valonia favulosa .................................................................... 371 

Valoniaforbesii .................................................................... 370 

Valonia ventricosa ............................................................. .372. 373 

Ventricaria ventricosa ................................................................ 372 

Wrangelia argus .................................................................... 424 

Wrangelia tayloriana ................................................................ 425 

Zonaria variegata ................................................................... 401 

Manuscript received 9 March 1995. accepted 31 August 1995

Fig. 1. Map of Rotuma Island, showing collecting sites and locations mentioned in the text. 1, Maka 

Bay; 2, 'Ahau; 3, Jolmea; 4, Mea; 5, Ropure; 6, Hof6a; 7, Lopta; 8, Oinafa; 9, Paptea; 10, Noa'tau; 

11, Tua'koi; 12, Savlei; 13, Isilepi; 14, Hapmafau Bay; 15, Kelega; 16, Fapufa; 17, Losa; 18, Itumuta; 

19, Solnohu (Juju). 

0 

* TUVALU 1O0S - 

FUT UNA 

' WALLIS 

'C 

SAMOA 

0 

" ' 200s- 

TONGA 

9 . 

100 km 

Fig. 2. Map showing the regional location of Rotuma in the context of its neighbouring island groups.


Fig. 3. Map of Rotuma Island and its surrounding islets. 1, Hauati'u and Hauamea'me'a; 2, 'Afgaha; 3, 

Solkope; 4, Solnohu; 5, Hafliua; 6, Hatana; 7, Hafhaveiaglolo; 8, Uea 

Fig. 4. General view of the Rotuman south coast, showing the regular range of hills in the island's 

centre (taken from Hapmafau Bay). Fig. 5. View of algal habitats at Losa (site of Meristotheca 

procumbens growth). Fig. 6. General view of Tua'koi reef at low tide. Kelega point in the background. 

Fig. 7. View of reef edge at Lopta, showing exposed conditions and growths of Cheilosporum 

spectabile hanging from coral ledges.

Fig. 8. Cladophora conferta. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 9. Rhizoclonium grande. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 10. 

Rhizoclonium africanunz. Scale = 50 km. Fig. 11. (a, b) Cladophoropsis sundanensis (a) Scale = 

100 pm. (b) general habit of plant (scale = 2.5 mm). Fig. 12. Dictyosphaeria cavernosa. Scale = 

5 mm. Fig. 13. Ventricaria ventricosa. Scale = 5 mm. Fig. 14. Boergesenia forbesii. Scale = 10rnm. 

Fig. 15. (a, b) Valoizia aegagropila. (Scales: a = 3 mm; b = 3 mm.)


Fig. 16. Enteronzorpha flexuosa. View of surface cells. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 17. Rhizoclolzicrln 

qfrican~rm. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 18. Codium sp. Scale = 3 mm. Fig. 19. Boodlea coacta. Scale = 200 

pm. Fig. 20. Rhizocloniunz graizde. Pigmented rhizoids. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 21. Struvea 

anastonzosans. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 22. Struvea aizastomosans. Detail of lateral branch. Scale = 

200 pm. Fig. 23. Veiztricaria ventricosa. Scale = 10 mm. 

457


Fig. 24. Caulerpa cupressoides. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 25. Caulerpa cupressoides var. mamillosa. Scale 

= 10 mm. Fig. 26. Caulerpa cupressoides var. lycopodiunz f. elegans. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 27. (a, b) 

Caulerpa racemosa var. uvifera. (a) Habit. (b) Detail of erect axis. Scales: a = 10 mm; b = 2 mm. 

Fig. 28. Caulerpa racernosa var. clavifera. Scale = 1 mm. Fig. 29. Caulerpa racemosa var. turbinata. 

Scale = 2 mm. Fig. 30. Caulerpa serrulata var. boryana f. occidentalis. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 31. 

Caulerpa racenzosa var. peltata. Scale = 1 mm. Fig. 32. Caulerpa serrulata. Scale = 10 mm.


Fig. 33. Caulerpa cupressoides var. lycopodium. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 34. Caulerpa cupressoides var. 

lycopodium f. elegans. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 35. Caulerpa cupressoides var. nzanzillosa. Scale = 5 cm. 

Fig. 36. Caulerpa racenzosa var. clavifera. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 37. Caulerpa racemosa var. peltata. 

Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 38. Caulerpa serrulata. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 39. Caulerpa serrulata. Scale = 

5 cm. Fig. 40. Caulerpa serrulata var. boryana f. occidentalis. Scale = 5 cm.

Fig. 41. (a-c) Codium arabicum. Peripheral utricles. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 42. Codium bulbopilum. 

a, b and c to the same scale = 100 pm. Fig. 43. Codium arabicum. General habit. Scale = 20 mm. 

Fig. 44. Codium sp. Peripheral utricle. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 45. Codium bulbopilum. Habit. 

Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 46. Codium sp. Habit. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 47. Codium sp. Peripheral utricle. 

Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 48. Bryopsis harveyana. Detail of primary branch with unilateral secondary 

branchlets. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 49. Bryopsis plumosa. Detail of branch showing bilateral 

arrangement of secondary branchlets. Scale = 200 pm.


Fig. 50. Avrailzvillea amadelpha. (a) Cortical siphon. (b) Habit of thallus. Scales: a = 50 pm; 

b = 5 mm. Fig. 51. Avrailzvillea rotunzensis. (a, b, d) Torulose cortical siphons. (c) Habit of plant. 

Scales: a, b, d = 100 pm; c = 20 mm. Fig. 52. Rhipilia orientalis. (a) Siphon with lateral appendages. 

(b) Habit of thallus. Scales: a = 50 pm; b = 5 mm. Fig. 53. Avrailzvillea rotunzensis. Cortical siphon. 

Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 54. Chlorodesi7zis hildebrandtii. Filament showing dichotomy with equal 

constrictions. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 55. Chlorodesinis major. Filament showing equal dichotomy. 

Scale = 100 pm.


Fig. 56. Avrairzvillea roturnensis. Habit of thallus. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 57. Chlorodesmis major. Habit. 

Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 58. Neorneris vanbosseae. (a, b) to the same scale = 10 mm. Fig. 59. Codiurn 

arabicunz. Habit. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 60. Blyopsis pluiizosa. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 61. Rhipidosiphon 

javensis. Parallel filaments of thallus showing characteristic unequal constrictions above dichotomy. 

Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 62. Rhipilia orientallsland. Habit. Scale = 5 mm. Fig. 63. Chlorodesnzis 

hildebrandtii. Habit. Scale = 20 mm. Fig. 64. (a, b) Rhipilia orientalis. (a) Siphon. (b, c) Terminal 

prongs of lateral appendages. Scale = 25 pm.


Fig. 65. Halimeda bikinensis. Peripheral utricles in lateral and surface view. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 66. 

Halimeda cuneata. Peripheral utricles in lateral and surface view. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 67. Halimeda 

discoidea. Peripheral utricles in lateral and surface view. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 68. Halimeda bikinensis. 

Medullary filaments. Scale = 50 pm Fig. 69. Halilneda micronesica. Peripheral utricles in lateral and 

surface view. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 70. (a, b) Halimeda opuntia. (a) Peripheral utricles. (b) var. opuntia, 

surface view of peripheral utricles. (c) var. hederacea, surface view of peripheral utricles. All to the 

same scale = 50 pm. Fig. 71. (a, b) Halimeda macrophysa. (a) Peripheral utricles. (b) Surface view of 

peripheral utricles. Scales: a = 100 pm; b = 200 pm. Fig. 72. Halimeda taenicola. Medullary 

filaments. Scale = 50 km. Fig. 73. Halinzeda tuna. Medullary filaments. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 74. 

Halimeda taenicola. Peripheral utricles in lateral and surface view. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 75. (a, b) 

Halimeda tuna. (a) Surface view of peripheral utricles. (b) Peripheral utricles in lateral view. Scales: 

a = 50 pm; b = 50 pm. Fig. 76. Halimeda simulans. Peripheral utricles in lateral and surface view. 

Scale = 50 pm.

Fig. 77. Halimeda bikinerzsis. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 78. Halimeda curzeata. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 79. 

Halimeda discoidea. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 80. Halimeda nzacrophysa. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 81. Halimeda 

nzicronesica. Characteristic fan-shaped basal segment. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 82. Halinzeda nzicronesica. 

Scale = 5 cm.


Fig. 83. Halinzeda opuntia var. opuiztia. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 84. Haliineda opuntia var. hederacea. 

Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 85. Halinzeda sinzulans. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 86. Halinzeda taeiaicola. Scale = 5 cm. 

Fig. 87. Halinzeda tuna. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 88. Halinzeda tuna. Scale = 5 cm. 

465

Fig. 89. Polyphysa parvula. Scale = 500 p,m. 

Fig. 90. (a, b) Neomeris vanbosseae. (a, b) Cortical assimilatory cells with sporangial cyst between 

them. Both scales = 100 Ikm.


Fig. 91. Dictyopteris repens. Detail of blade showing sporangia. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 92. 

Dictyopteris repens. Detail of blade showing apical cell (anow). Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 93. Dictyota 

friabilis. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 94. Dictyota ,friabilis. Paired apical cells. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 95. 

Hincksia breviarticulata. Hooked secondary branchlet. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 96. Chnoospora minima. 

Habit. Scale = 5 mm. Fig. 97. Sargassurn polycystunz. Habit. Scale = 20 mm.

Fig. 98. (a-e) Hincksia breviarticulata. (a) Individual filament with hooked laterals. (b, e) Filament 

bearing plurilocular sporangia. (c, d) Detail of secondary branchlets. Scales: a = 200 pm; b, e = 25 pm; 

c, d = 50 pm. Fig. 99. (a, b) Sphacelaria rigidula. (a) Propagula with convex apical cell. (b) Lateral 

unilocular sporangia. Scales: a, b = 25 p,m. Fig. 100. Dictyota friabilis.Cross-section showing 

tristromatic blade. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 101. Dictyota,friabilis. Sporangia. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 102. 

Dilophus radicans. Branch apex showing apical cell and subapicular sporangia. Scale = 100 pm. 

Fig. 103. Dilophus radicans. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 104. Dilophus radicans. 

Habit. Scale = 1 mm.


Fig. 105. Lobophora variegata. Marginal row of apical cells. Scale = 25 km. Fig. 106. Lobophora 

variegata. Cross-section showing pentastromatic thallus. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 107. Chnoospora 

minima. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 25 km. Fig. 108. (a-c) Sargassum polycystum. (a, b) Detail 

of thallus showing pedunculate vesicles and Y-shaped proliferations. (c) Detail of lanceolate leaf. All 

scales = 2 mm. (d, e) Sargassum sp. (d) Detail of thallus showing fusiform vesicle, smooth main axis 

and cymose receptacular branches. (e) Detail of obovate leaves from mid-thallus. Scales: d = 2 mm, 

e = 5 mm. (fi Padina tenuis. Cross-section of thallus showing non-indusiate sporangia. Scale = 50 km.


Fig. 118. Erythrotrichia carnea. Scale = 25 p,m. Fig. 119. Audouinella polyblasta. Scale = 25 pm. 

Fig. 120. Gelidiella acerosa. Lateral section of fertile side branchlet, showing cruciate sporangia. 

(a) Detail of sporangia. Scales: a, b = 50 p m Fig. 121. Liagora valida. Assimilatory filaments. Scale 

= 25 p,m.

Fig. 122. Peyssonnelia sp. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 123. Peyssoiznelia sp. Surface 

view of thallus. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 124. Cheilosporu~n spectabile. Branch lobes. Scale = 200 pm. 

Fig. 125. (a-c) Jania rubens. (a) Dichotomous branching. (b) Branch apex. (c) Terminal conceptacle. 

All to the same scale = 100 pm. Fig. 126. Jania adhaerens. Detail of branching angle. Scale 

= 100 pm.


Fig. 127. Melanamansia glomerata. Habit. Scale = 5 mm. Fig. 128. Melanarnansia glomerata. 

Marginal stichidia bearing tetrasporangia. Scale = 200 p,m. Fig. 129. Bostrychia tenella. Scale = 200 

km. Fig. 130. Chondria simpliciuscula. Habit. Scale = 200 p,m. Fig. 131. Martensia elegans. Habit. 

Scale = 5 mm. Fig. 132. Laurencia verzusta. Cross-section of thallus showing characteristic lenticular 

thickenings of medullary cells (arrow). Scale = 25 p,m. Fig. 133. Chondria simpliciuscula. Detail of 

apical region, showing apical cell and apical crown of trichoblasts. Scale = 25 p,m. Fig. 134. Chondria 

dasyphylla. Scale = 100 p,m. Fig. 135. Laurencia venusta. Habit. Scale = 5 mm.


Fig. 136. Hypnea nidulans. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 137. Meristotheca 

procumbens. Stellate medullary cells and surface view of thallus. Scale = 25 km. Fig. 138. (a, b) 

Coelarthrum boergesenii. (a) Surface view of cortical cells. (b) Habit. Scales: a = 25 pm; b = 1.5 mm. 

Fig. 139. Rhodymenia divaricata. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 50 p,m.


Fig. 140. Hydrolithorz farirzosunz. Showing radially arranged quadrangular cells. Scale = 50 pm. 

Fig. 141. Jania rubens. Habit. Scale in mm. Fig. 142. Meristotheca procumbens. Habit of thallus in 

situ, showing attachment to Acropora rubble (arrow). Fig. 143. Meristotheca procurnbens. Habit of 

living specimens shortly after collecting. Fig. 144. Meristotheca procumbens. Cross-section of thallus 

showing medullary region of stellate cells. Scale = 100 p m Fig. 145. Meristotheca procunzbens. 

Surface view of cortical cells. Scale = 20 pm. Fig. 146. Meristotheca procu~nbens. Detail of medullary 

stellate cells. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 147. Meristotheca procunzberzs. Cross-section of cortex showing 

rectangular cortical cells. Scale = 20 Km.


Fig. 148. Centroceras apiculatunz. Habit. Scale = 200 bm. Fig. 149. Centroceras apiculatum. Detail 

of thallus cortication. Scale = 25 ym. Fig. 150. Centroceras apiculatum. Tip of branch showing 

transversally-dividing apical cell. Scale = 25 ym. Fig. 151. Centroceras apiculatum. Detail of fertile 

branch showing cruciate tetraspores. Scale = 25 wm.


Fig. 152. Cerarnium zacae. Detail of cortical bands. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 153. Ceramium zacae. Habit 

of thallus. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 154. Ceramiurn vagans. Detail of creeping thallus with hyaline 

rhizoids projecting from ventral nodal surface. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 155. (a, b) Ceramiurn codii. 

(a) Detail of cortical bands. (6) Thallus apex, showing apical cells. Both same scale = 25 pm.


Fig. 156. Ceramium mazatlanense. Detail of cortical bands, showing characteristic upward-curving 

edges. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 157. Ceramium mazatlanense. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 158. 

Cerarnium vagans. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 159. Cerarnium vagans. Detail of cortical bands. 

Scale = 25 bm.


Fig. 160. Champia parvula. Surface view of thallus showing the two types of cortical cells. Scale 

= 25 pm. Fig. 161. Rhodynzenia divaricata. Habit. Scale = 5 cm. Fig. 162. Ceramiurn vagans. Habit. 

Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 163. Centroceras apiculatum. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 164. Ceramiurn 

zacae. Branch apex showing forcipate tips. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 165. Ceramiunz mazatlanense. Habit 

showing cystocarp. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 166. Ceramiurn codii. Habit. Scale = 25 pm Fig. 167. 

Wrangelia argus. Nodal tetrasporangia surrounded by short-celled involucral filament. Scale = 25 pm.


Fig. 168. Grzffithsia subcylirzdrica. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 169. Wrangelia argus. Habit. Scale 

= 50 pm. Fig. 170. Wrarzgelia argus. Nodal tetrasporangia surrounded by short-celled involucral 

filament. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 171. Wrarzgelia argus. Detail of thallus showing nodal tetrasporangia. 

Scale = 25 pm.


Fig. 172. Wrangelia argus. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 173. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Habit. 

Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 174. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Detail of main axis showing divaricating 

pseudolateral branches. Scale = 200 Fm. Fig. 175. Heterosiphonia crispella var. laxa. Habit of plant 

showing determinate branching. Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 176. Hypoglossunz caloglossoides. Thallus 

showing endogenous branching. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 177. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Detail of 

pedicellate tetrasporangial stichidia. Scale = 25 km. Fig. 178. Hypoglossum caloglossoides. Detail of 

regenerating thallus. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 179. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Detail of carpogonium. 

Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 180. Hypoglossum caloglossoides. Habit. Scale = 200 pm.

Fig. 181. Heterosiphonia crispella var. ha. Habit of plant showing. determinate branching. Scale 

= 50 pm. Fig. 182. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Detail bf pedicellate-tetrasporangial stichid;. Scale 

= 50 pm. Fig. 183. Heterosiphonia subsecunda. Detail of carpogonium. Scale = 25 pm.


Fig. 184. Hypoglossum caloglossoides. Thallus showing endogenous branching. Scale = 25 pm. 

Fig. 185. Melananzansia glomerata. Marginal curved stichidia bearing tetraspores. Scale = 50 km. 

Fig. 186. Bostrychia tenella. Habit showing pinnate branching. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 187. Luurencia 

venusta. Cross-section of thallus showing lenticular thickening of medullary cells. Scale = 50 km.

Fig. 188. (a, b) Chorzdria dasyphylla. (a) Cross-section of thallus. (b) View of surface cells. Both 

scales = 100 km. Fig. 189. Chordria sedifolia. Cross-section of thallus. Scale = 50 km. Fig. 190. (a, 

b) Chondria sinzpliciusc~~la. (a) Detail of apical region, showing apical cell and apical crown of 

trichoblasts. (6) Fertile branchlet with tetrasporangia. Both same scale = 25 pm. Fig. 191. (a, b) 

Chorzdria serlifolia. (a) Detail of cruciate tetrasporangia. (b) Cross-section of fertile branchlet showing 

tetrasporangia. Scales: a = 25 km; b = 50 km.


Fig. 192. Gelidiopsis intricata. Detail of spatulate terminal sporangia. Scale = 100 pm. Fig. 193. 

Lauremia sp. Habit. Scale = 3 mm. Fig. 194. Lawencia sp. Cross-section of thallus showing cortical 

cells joined by pit connections. Scale = 25 pm. Fig. 195. (a, b) Coelothrix irregularis. (a) Crosssection 

of thallus, showing gland cells. Scale = 100 pm. (b) Detail of thallus surface, showing two 

distinct types of cells. Both at same scale = 100 pm. Fig. 196. Gelidiul~zpnsillt~rn. Longitudinal section 

of thallus showing internal rhizines. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 197. Melarzarna~zsia glonzerata. Cross-section 

of blade showing elongate cells in V-shaped transverse rows. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 198. Melananzansia 

glomerata. Surface view of thallus. Scale = 50 pm. Fig. 199. Centroceras clavulaturn. Detail of axis 

cortication. Scale = 25 pm.

Fig. 200. Herposiphonia secunda f. tenella. Habit. Scale = 200 pm. Fig. 201. Luurencia sp. Habit. 

Scale = 10 mm. Fig. 202. Luurerzcia sp. Cross-section of thallus showing cortical cells joined by pit 

connections (arrow). Scale = 25 Fm. Fig. 203. Meristotheca procumbens. Habit in situ. Fig. 204. 

Meristotheca procumbens. Thalli being soaked in seawater prior to cleaning and cooking. Fig. 205. 

Meristotheca procumbens. Cooked and seasoned pudding (Lumie'ta), ready for consumption.


Fig. 206. Herposiphonia secunda f. tenella Habit. Scale = 100 km. Fig. 207. (a-d) Polysiphonia 

scopulorum. (a) Habit. (b) Detail of branch showing trichoblasts. (c) Cross-section of thallus showing 

the four pericentral cells around the axial cell. (d) Detail of prostate axis showing rhizoids in open 

connection with pericentral cells. All scales = 50 pm.

Rotuman Algal Flora 

Composition At Each Station 


Fig. 208. (a, b) Habit of commensal 

crab found on Haliineda macrophysa. 

Note pronounced mimicry, including 

attachment of living Halimeda 

segments to crab (arrow). Scales: 

a = 3 mm; b = 100 pm. 

A F HHAPI J K LLSMAKM 0 P R T 

Green Brown Red All 

Fig. 209. Rotuman algal flora, composition at each station. F, Fapufa; H, Hofka; HAP, Hapmafau; 

I, Isilepi; J, Jolmea; K, Kelega; L, Lopta; LS, Losa; M, Mea; MAK, Maka; 0, Oinafa; R, Ropure; 

T, Tua'koi; A, 'Ahau.


Rotuman Algal Flora 

Overall Composition 

Rhodophyceae Phaeophyceae Chlorophyceae 

ALGAL TAXA NEW RECORDS 

Fig. 210. Rotuman algal flora, overall composition. 

I Rotuma: North-South Flora Comparison 

Main Contrastng Algal Genera 

Fig. 211. Rotuma, main contrasting north-south algal species. 

Halimeda 

Caulerpa 

Avrainvillea 

Rhlpiiia sp. 

Melanarnansia

CENTRAL AND SOUTHWESTERN PACIFIC REGION 

MICRONESIA 


Fig. 212. Map of the tropical and sub-tropical western Pacific, showing prevailing ocean currents in 

January (adapted from Ash 1992).

Download (6Mb) - USP Electronic Research Repository - The ...

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?